diff --git a/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls b/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls new file mode 100644 index 0000000..905a10c --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls @@ -0,0 +1,6347 @@ +%% +%% IEEEtran.cls 2015/08/26 version V1.8b +%% +%% This is the IEEEtran LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of +%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and +%% conferences. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ +%% +%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes +%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version. +%% +%% +%% Contributors: +%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), +%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), +%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2014) +%% +%% +%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, +%% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter, +%% Juergen von Hagen +%% and +%% Copyright (c) 2001-2015 by Michael Shell +%% +%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.8b): Michael Shell +%% See: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau +%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command +%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. +%% +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%% +%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex +%% +%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an +%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will +%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA. +%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version +%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls". +%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user, +%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the +%% correct version information. +%% The changes should also be documented via source comments. +%%************************************************************************* +%% +% +% Available class options +% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} +% +% *** choose only one from each category *** +% +% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt +% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt. +% +% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca +% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers, +% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user +% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like +% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for +% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is +% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review +% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will +% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the +% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are +% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like +% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted +% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact +% information can be easily seen on the cover page. +% The default is journal. +% +% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final +% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for +% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version. +% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX +% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows +% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like +% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot +% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably +% also want to select onecolumn. +% The default is final. +% +% letterpaper, a4paper, cspaper +% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in, 210mm X 297mm or 7.875in X 10.75in. +% Changing the paper size in the standard journal and conference modes +% will not alter the typesetting of the document - only the margins will +% be affected. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will +% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer +% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top +% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. +% For the compsoc conference and draft modes, it is the margins that will +% remain constant, and thus the text area size will vary, with changes in +% the paper size. +% The cspaper option is the special ``trim'' paper size (7.875in x 10.75in) +% used in the actual publication of Computer Society journals. Under +% compsoc journal mode, this option does not alter the typesetting of the +% document. Authors should invoke the cspaper option only if requested to +% do so by the editors of the specific journal they are submitting to. +% For final submission to the IEEE, authors should generally use US letter +% (8.5 X 11in) paper unless otherwise instructed. Note that authors should +% ensure that all post-processing (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper +% specificiation as the .tex document. Problems here are by far the number +% one reason for incorrect margins. IEEEtran will automatically set the +% default paper size under pdflatex (without requiring any change to +% pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more important to dvips users. Fix +% config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for dvips, or use the +% dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. For the cspaper option, +% the corresponding dvips paper name is "ieeecs". +% See the testflow documentation +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow +% for more details on dvips paper size configuration. +% The default is letterpaper. +% +% oneside, twoside +% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex) +% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of +% the pages. +% The default is oneside. +% +% onecolumn, twocolumn +% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One +% column mode is usually used only with draft papers. +% The default is twocolumn. +% +% comsoc, compsoc, transmag +% Use the format of the IEEE Communications Society, IEEE Computer Society +% or IEEE Transactions on Magnetics, respectively. +% +% romanappendices +% Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls +% now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what +% v1.6b and earlier did. +% +% captionsoff +% disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals +% request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages +% of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat +% package can be used with this class option to achieve this format. +% +% nofonttune +% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those +% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned" +% their fonts. +% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters. +% +% +%---------- +% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted): +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch +% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin +% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin +% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin +% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin +% +% Available CLASSINFOs provided: +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional) +% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro) +% \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro) +% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length) +% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length) +% +% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided: +% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted, +% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +% point size options provided as a single macro: +% \CLASSOPTIONpt +% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's +% normalsize point size. +% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview +% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls + + + + + +\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2015/08/26 V1.8b by Michael Shell] +\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} +\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/} +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + +% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3 +% These values serve as a way a .tex file can +% determine if the new features are provided. +% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from +% these values. i.e., V1.4 +% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that- +% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here) +\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} +\def\IEEEtransversionminor{8} + + +% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting +\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} + + +% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls +\newif\if@restonecol +\newif\if@titlepage + + +% class option conditionals +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc \CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag \CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse + +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse + + +% class info conditionals + +% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output +\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse + + +% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper +\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse +% V1.6b internal flag to show if using cspaper +\newif\if@IEEEusingcspaper \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse + + +% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers +% dimen +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC +% count +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountC +% token list +\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA + +% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs) +% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some +% external packages +\def\@ptsize{0} +% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt +\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}} +\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}} +\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}} +\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}} + + + +\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% + \setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% + \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse + \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}} + + +\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% + \setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% + \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue + \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}} + +% special paper option for compsoc journals +\DeclareOption{cspaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{7.875in}% + \setlength{\paperheight}{10.75in}% + \@IEEEusingcspapertrue + \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{ieeecs}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{7.875in}% + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{10.75in}} + +\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse + \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse} +\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue + \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse} + +\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse} +\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse} + +% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages +% will go into draft mode. +\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} +% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages +% used by the document. +\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} +% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer. +\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} +\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} + +\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue} + +\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} + +\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue} + +\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue} + +\DeclareOption{comsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcomsoctrue\CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse} + +\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue\CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse} + +\DeclareOption{transmag}{\CLASSOPTIONtransmagtrue\CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse} + +\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue} + + +% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal +\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal} +% overrride these defaults per user requests +\ProcessOptions + + + +%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- + +% Sets the category codes for punctuation to their normal values. +% For local use with argument scanning. +\def\IEEEnormalcatcodespunct{\catcode`\!=12 \catcode`\,=12 \catcode`\:=12 +\catcode`\;=12 \catcode`\`=12 \catcode`\'=12 \catcode`\"=12 \catcode`\.=12 +\catcode`\/=12 \catcode`\?=12 \catcode`\*=12 \catcode`\+=12 \catcode`\-=12 +\catcode`\<=12 \catcode`\>=12 \catcode`\(=12 \catcode`\)=12 \catcode`\[=12 +\catcode`\]=12 \catcode`\==12 \catcode`\|=12} +% Sets the category codes for numbers to their normal values. +% For local use with argument scanning. +\def\IEEEnormalcatcodesnum{\catcode`\0=12 \catcode`\1=12 \catcode`\2=12 +\catcode`\3=12 \catcode`\4=12 \catcode`\5=12 \catcode`\6=12 \catcode`\7=12 +\catcode`\8=12 \catcode`\9=12} +% combined action of \IEEEnormalcatcodespunct and \IEEEnormalcatcodesnum +\def\IEEEnormalcatcodes{\IEEEnormalcatcodespunct\IEEEnormalcatcodesnum} + + +% usage: \@IEEEextracttoken*{} +% \@IEEEextracttoken fully expands its argument (which it then stores in +% \@IEEEextracttokenarg) via \edef and then the meaning of the first +% nonbrace (but including the empty group) token found is assigned via \let +% to \@IEEEextractedtoken as well as stored in the macro +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during +% the acquisition of the first are stored in \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded, +% however their original relative brace nesting depths are not guaranteed to +% be preserved. +% If the argument is empty, or if a first nonbrace token does not exist (or +% is an empty group), \@IEEEextractedtoken will be \relax and +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro and \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded will be empty. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEextracttoken{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}} +% results in: +% +% \@IEEEextracttokenarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g} +% \@IEEEextractedtoken ==> the letter a +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro ==> a macro containing a +% \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd{ef}g +% +% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttoken*, does not expand its argument +% contents during processing. +\def\@IEEEextracttoken{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\def\@@IEEEextracttoken}{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttoken}} + +\def\@@IEEEextracttoken#1{\@IEEEextracttokendef\@IEEEextracttokenarg{#1}\relax +\def\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{}\relax % initialize to empty +% if the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single undelimited argument +% with anything after it being stripped off as a delimited argument +% we know we have one token without any enclosing braces. loop until this is true. +\let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEextracttokenarg +\loop + % trap case of an empty argument as this would cause a problem with + % \@@@IEEEextracttoken's first (nondelimited) argument acquisition + \ifx\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@empty + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{}\relax + \else + \expandafter\@@@IEEEextracttoken\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER\relax + \fi + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup + \else + \let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup=\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro +\repeat +% we can safely do a \let= here because there should be at most one token +% the relax is needed to handle the case of no token found +\expandafter\let\expandafter\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\relax} + +\def\@@@IEEEextracttoken#1#2\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{#1}\relax +\def\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{#2}\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter +\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter +{\expandafter\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded}} +%% +%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- + + + +% Computer Society conditional execution command +\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} +% inverse +\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} +% compsoc conference +\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} +% compsoc not conference +\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} + + +% comsoc verify that newtxmath, mtpro2, mt11p or mathtime has been loaded +\def\@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\typeout{-- Verifying Times compatible math font.}\relax + \@ifpackageloaded{newtxmath}{\typeout{-- newtxmath loaded, OK.}}{\@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}} +\def\@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mtpro2}{\typeout{-- mtpro2 loaded, OK.}}{\@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}} +\def\@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mt11p}{\typeout{-- mt11p2 loaded, OK.}}{\@@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}} +\def\@@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mathtime}{\typeout{-- mathtime loaded, OK.}}{\@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}} + +% comsoc, if a Times math font was not loaded by user, enforce it +\def\@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\typeout{** Times compatible math font not found, forcing.}\relax +\IfFileExists{newtxmath.sty}{\typeout{-- Found newtxmath, loading.}\RequirePackage{newtxmath}}{\@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}} +\def\@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mtpro2.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mtpro2, loading.}\RequirePackage{mtpro2}}{\@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}} +\def\@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mt11p.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mt11p, loading.}\RequirePackage{mt11p}}{\@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}} +\def\@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mathtime.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mathtime, loading.}\RequirePackage{mathtime}}{\@@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}} +% if no acceptable Times math font package found, error with newtxmath requirement +\def\@@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\typeout{** No Times compatible math font package found. newtxmath is required.}\RequirePackage{newtxmath}} + + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc + % ensure that if newtxmath is used, the cmintegrals option is also invoked + \PassOptionsToPackage{cmintegrals}{newtxmath} + % comsoc requires a Times like math font + % ensure this requirement is satisfied at document start + \AtBeginDocument{\@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont} +\fi + + + +% The IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times. +% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package. +\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} +\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} +\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} + +% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font, +% not Times Roman. +\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}} + +% enable the selected main text font +\normalfont\selectfont + + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc + \typeout{-- Using IEEE Communications Society mode.} +\fi + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.} +\fi + + +% V1.7 conference notice message hook +\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}% +\typeout{** Conference Paper **}% +\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}% +\typeout{}% +\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}% +\typeout{ of your paper;}% +\typeout{}% +\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}% +\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}% +\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}% +\typeout{}} + + +% we can send console reminder messages to the user here +\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi} + + +% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else% + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else% + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}% + \fi% +\fi + + +% V1.7 improved paper size setting code. +% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that +% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered, +% even if only effect is to set them to \relax. +% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special +{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{% +% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax +% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput +% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput. +\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth +\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}% +% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special +\ifcase\pdfoutput +\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}% +\else +% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag +\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue +\fi}} + +% let the user know the selected papersize +\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space +(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.} + +\ifCLASSINFOpdf +\typeout{-- Using PDF output.} +\else +\typeout{-- Using DVI output.} +\fi + + +% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{} +% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{}, +% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc. +% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as +% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues +% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}. +% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion. +%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}} +%\def\@journal{} + + + +% pointsize values +% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size +\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9} +\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10} +\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11} +\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12} + + + +% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) +% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and +% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems +% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want +% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading) +% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down) +% 10pt 58 12pt (exact) +% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down) +% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact) +% + +% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size +% in case baselinestretch ever changes. +% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink +\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip + + + +%% ******* WARNING! ******* +%% +%% Authors should not alter font sizes, baselineskip ("leading"), +%% margins or other spacing values in an attempt to squeeze more +%% material on each page. +%% +%% The IEEE's own typesetting software will restore the correct +%% values when re-typesetting/proofing the submitted document, +%% possibly resulting in unexpected article over length charges. +%% +%% ******* WARNING! ******* + + +% 9pt option defaults +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine +\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 3pt +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}} +\fi +% +% 10pt option defaults +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten +\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4pt +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} +% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} +\fi +% +% 11pt option defaults +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven +\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5pt +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} +\fi +% +% 12pt option defaults +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve +\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6pt +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} +\fi + + + +% V1.8a compsoc font sizes +% compsoc font sizes use bp "Postscript" point units (1/72in) +% rather than the traditional pt (1/72.27) +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% -- compsoc defaults -- +% ** will override some of these values later ** +% 9pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{11bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5bp}{10bp}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 10bp +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10bp}{12bp}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10bp}{12bp}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12bp}{14bp}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14bp}{17bp}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17bp}{20bp}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20bp}{24bp}} +\fi +% +% 10pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{12bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9bp}{10bp}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}} +% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11bp +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11bp}{13.5bp}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}} +\fi +% +% 11pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.5bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.5bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 12bp +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12bp}{14bp}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}} +\fi +% +% 12pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14bp}}% +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14bp}% +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}} +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}} +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}} +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}} +% sublargesize is the same as large - 14bp +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14bp}{17bp}} +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14bp}{17bp}} +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17bp}{20bp}} +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20bp}{24bp}} +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22bp}{26bp}} +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}} +\fi +% +% -- override defaults: compsoc journals use special normalsizes -- +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +% +% compsoc conferences +% 9pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\fi +% 10pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{11.2bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.2bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\fi +% 11pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\fi +% 12pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\fi +% +% compsoc nonconferences +\else +% 9pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp +\fi +% 10pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten +% the official spec is 9.5bp with 11.4bp leading for 10pt, +% but measurements of proofs suggest upto 11.723bp leading +% here we'll use 11.54bp which gives 61 lines per column +% with the standard compsoc margins +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9.5bp}{11.54bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.54bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp +\fi +% 11pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp +\fi +% 12pt +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}} +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp} +\normalsize +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp +\fi +\fi\fi + + + + +% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for +% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead, but the default and correct +% Times font will scale exactly as needed) increase the substitution +% tolerance to turn off this warning. +% +% V1.8a, the compsoc bp font sizes can also cause bogus font substitution +% warnings with footnote or scriptsize math and the $\bullet$ itemized +% list of \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks. So, increase this to 1.5pt or more. +\def\fontsubfuzz{1.7bp} + + +% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with +% technote +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else% + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}% + \fi% +\fi + + +% V1.7 +% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with +% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use +% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. +\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family +\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family +\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family +\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family +\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family +\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else +\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax} + + + + +% set the default \baselinestretch +\def\baselinestretch{1} +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes +\fi + + +% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch +\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined +\else + \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to + \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} +\fi + +\small\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect + + + + +% store the normalsize baselineskip +\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip +\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax +% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip +% we could save a register by giving the user access to +% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect +% its read only internal status +\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax +% store the nominal value of jot +\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot +\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax + +% set \jot +\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax + + + + +% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing +% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a +% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em) +% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%. +% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of: +% +% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt +% +% However, the IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need +% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, the IEEE +% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words. +% The IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be: +% 35% nominal +% 23% minimum +% 50% maximum +% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.) +% +% for bold text, the IEEE increases the spacing a little more: +% 37.5% nominal +% 23% minimum +% 55% maximum + +% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use +% for medium (normal weight) +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50} + +% for bold +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} + + +% compsoc nonconference papers use Palatino, +% tweak settings to better match the proofs +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else +% for medium (normal weight) +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.28} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.21} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.47} +% for bold +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.305} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.21} +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.52} +\fi\fi + + +% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: +% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space +% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch +% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink +% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands +% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes +\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{% +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead. +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% +\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}} + +% revise the interword spacing for each font weight +\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% +\mdseries +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}% +\bfseries +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}% +}} + +% revise the interword spacing for each font shape +% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are +% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what the IEEE uses) so we +% won't alter these either. +\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% +\normalfont +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens +\normalfont\itshape +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens +}} + +% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape +% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a +% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers. +\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily +\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens +\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}} + +% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing +% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make +% sure all the default fonts are loaded +\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else +\@IEEEtunefonts +\fi + +% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts +\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi} + + + + + +% -- V1.8a page setup commands -- + +% The default sample text for calculating margins +% Note that IEEE publications use \scriptsize for headers and footers. +\def\IEEEdefaultsampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT} +\def\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize T}% IEEE headers default to uppercase +\def\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize gT} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsettextwidth{inner margin}{outer margin} +% Sets \textwidth to allow the specified inner and outer margins +% for the current \paperwidth. +\def\IEEEsettextwidth#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\paperwidth +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#1\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#2\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\textwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsetsidemargin{mode: i, o, c, a}{margin/offset} +% Sets \oddsidemargin and \evensidemargin to yield the specified margin +% of the given mode. +% The available modes are: +% i = inner margin +% o = outer margin +% c = centered, with the given offset +% a = adjust the margins using the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values increase the inner margin. +% \textwidth should be set properly for the given margins before calling this +% function. +\def\IEEEsetsidemargin#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `i'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=i\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{i}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + \oddsidemargin\paperwidth + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth + \divide\oddsidemargin by 2\relax + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax + \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken o\relax + \oddsidemargin\paperwidth + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `i'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}% + \fi + \oddsidemargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax +\fi\fi\fi +% odd and even side margins both mean "inner" for single sided pages +\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin +% but are mirrors of each other when twosided is in effect +\if@twoside + \evensidemargin\paperwidth + \advance\evensidemargin by -\textwidth + \advance\evensidemargin by -\oddsidemargin + % have to compensate for both the builtin 1in LaTex offset + % and the fact we already subtracted this offset from \oddsidemargin + \advance\evensidemargin -2in\relax +\fi} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsettextheight[sample text]{top text margin}{bottom text margin} +% Sets \textheight based on the specified top margin and bottom margin. +% Takes into consideration \paperheight, \topskip, and (by default) the +% the actual height and depth of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +\def\IEEEsettextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettextheight}{\@IEEEsettextheight[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsettextheight[#1]#2#3{\textheight\paperheight\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract top margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract bottom margin + \advance \textheight by \topskip% add \topskip + % subtract off everything above the top, and below the bottom, baselines + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} + + + +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlength +\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff 0sp\relax +\def\IEEEquantizedlengthint{0} + +% usage: \IEEEquantizelength{mode: d, c, i}{base unit}{length} +% Sets the length \IEEEquantizedlength to be an integer multiple of the given +% (nonzero) base unit such that \IEEEquantizedlength approximates the given +% length. +% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff is a length equal to the difference between the +% \IEEEquantizedlength and the given length. +% \IEEEquantizedlengthint is a macro containing the integer number of base units +% in \IEEEquantizedlength. +% i.e., \IEEEquantizedlength = \IEEEquantizedlengthint * base unit +% The mode determines how \IEEEquantizedlength is quantized: +% d = always decrease (always round down \IEEEquantizeint) +% c = use the closest match +% i = always increase (always round up \IEEEquantizeint) +% In anycase, if the given length is already quantized, +% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff will be set to zero. +\def\IEEEquantizelength#1#2#3{\begingroup +% work in isolation so as not to externally disturb the \@IEEEtrantmp +% variables +% load the argument values indirectly via \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +% in case the user refers to our \@IEEEtrantmpdimenX, \IEEEquantizedlength, +% etc. in the arguments. we also will work with these as counters, +% i.e., in sp units +% A has the base unit +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #2\relax\relax\relax\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +% B has the input length +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #3\relax\relax\relax\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax +% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC will have the quantized int +% \IEEEquantizedlength will have the quantized length +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC will have the quantized diff +% initialize them to zero as this is what will be +% exported if an error occurs +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC 0\relax +\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC 0sp\relax +% extract mode +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `d'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c and i.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=d\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{d}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEquantizelength\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% check for base unit is zero error +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=0\relax +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Base unit is zero in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + \string\IEEEquantizedlength\space and \string\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\space are set to zero}{Division by zero is not allowed.}\relax +\else% base unit is nonzero + % \@IEEEtrantmpcountC carries the number of integer units + % in the quantized length (integer length \ base) + \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\relax + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax + % \IEEEquantizedlength has the (rounded down) quantized length + % = base * int + \IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax + \multiply\IEEEquantizedlength by \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\relax + % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the difference + % = quantized length - length + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + % trap special case of length being already quantized + % to avoid a roundup under i option + \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC=0sp\relax + \else % length not is already quantized + % set dimenA to carry the upper quantized (absolute value) difference: + % quantizedlength + base - length + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEquantizedlength\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + % set dimenB to carry the lower quantized (absolute value) difference: + % length - quantizedlength + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\IEEEquantizedlength\relax + % handle each mode + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + % compare upper and lower amounts, select upper if lower > upper + \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax + % use upper + \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \else% <=. uselower + % no need to do anything for lower, use output values already setup + \fi + \else% not mode c + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax + % always round up under i mode + \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken d\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `d'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c, and i.}\relax + \fi % if d + % no need to do anything for d, use output values already setup + \fi\fi % if i, c + \fi % if length is already quantized +\fi% if base unit is zero +% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing +% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables. +% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC has the quantized int +% \IEEEquantizedlength has the quantized length +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the quantized diff +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\endgroup +% locally assign the outputs here from the macros +\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro sp\relax +\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro sp\relax +\edef\IEEEquantizedlengthint{\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro}\relax} + + + +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff 0sp\relax + +% usage: \IEEEquantizetextheight[base unit]{mode: d, c, i} +% Sets \textheight to be an integer multiple of the current \baselineskip +% (or the optionally specified base unit) plus the first (\topskip) line. +% \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff is a length equal to the difference between +% the new quantized and original \textheight. +% \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc is a macro containing the integer number of +% lines per column under the quantized \textheight. i.e., +% \textheight = \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc * \baselineskip + \topskip +% The mode determines how \textheight is quantized: +% d = always decrease (always round down the number of lines per column) +% c = use the closest match +% i = always increase (always round up the number of lines per column) +% In anycase, if \textheight is already quantized, it will remain unchanged, +% and \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff will be set to zero. +% Depends on: \IEEEquantizelength +\def\IEEEquantizetextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizetextheight}{\@IEEEquantizetextheight[\baselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEquantizetextheight[#1]#2{\begingroup +% use our \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff as a scratch pad +% we need to subtract off \topskip before quantization +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\textheight +\advance\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff by -\topskip\relax +\IEEEquantizelength{#2}{#1}{\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff} +% add back \topskip line +\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \topskip +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthint\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax +% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing +% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables. +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\relax +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax +\endgroup +% locally assign the outputs here from the macros +\textheight\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro sp\relax +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro sp\relax +\edef\IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc{\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro}} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsettopmargin[sample text]{mode: t, b, c, a, q}{margin/offset} +% Sets \topmargin based on the specified vertical margin. +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \headsep, +% \topskip, and (by default) the the actual height (or, for the bottom, depth) +% of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +% The available modes are: +% t = top margin +% b = bottom margin +% c = vertically centered, with the given offset +% a = adjust the vertical margins using the given offset +% q = adjust the margins using \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff and the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values increase the top margin. +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \textheight should be set properly for the +% given margins before calling this function. +\def\IEEEsettopmargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettopmargin}{\@IEEEsettopmargin[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsettopmargin[#1]#2#3{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken q\relax + % we need to adjust by half the \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff value + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\relax + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax + % a positive \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff means we need to reduce \topmargin + % because \textheight has been lenghtened + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + \topmargin\paperheight + \advance\topmargin by -\textheight + % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout + \advance \topmargin by \topskip + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \divide\topmargin by 2\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax + \topmargin\paperheight + \advance\topmargin by -\textheight + % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout + \advance \topmargin by \topskip + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax + \fi + \topmargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax +\fi\fi % if t, b, c +% convert desired top margin into actual \topmargin +% this is not done for the q or a modes because they are only adjustments +\advance \topmargin by -\topskip +\advance \topmargin by -1in +\advance \topmargin by -\headheight +\advance \topmargin by -\headsep +\fi\fi % if q, a +} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsetheadermargin[header sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset} +% Differentially adjusts \topmargin and \headsep (such that their sum is unchanged) +% based on the specified header margin. +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \topskip, and (by default) +% the actual height (or depth) of the \IEEEdefaultheadersampletext and +% \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +% The available modes are: +% t = top margin (top of the header text to the top of the page) +% b = bottom margin (bottom of the header text to the top of the main text) +% c = vertically centered between the main text and the top of the page, +% with the given offset +% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values move the header downward. +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \topmargin should be set properly before +% calling this function. +\def\IEEEsetheadermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetheadermargin}{\@IEEEsetheadermargin[\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment + % value as is. The end adjustment of \topmargin and \headsep will + % do all that is needed +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + % get the bottom margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin + % subtract from it the top header margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\topmargin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\headheight + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom and top margins + % we need to adjust by half this amount to center the header + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax + % and add to offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin + % get the difference between the actual and the desired + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax + \fi + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topmargin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \headheight + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header top margin + % get the difference between the desired and the actual + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\fi\fi % if t, b, c +\fi % if a +% advance \topmargin by the needed amount and reduce \headsep by the same +% so as not to disturb the location of the main text +\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +\advance\headsep by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +} + + + +% usage: \IEEEsetfootermargin[footer sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset} +% Adjusts \footskip based on the specified footer margin. +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \paperheight, \headheight, +% \headsep, \textheight and (by default) the actual height (or depth) of the +% \IEEEdefaultfootersampletext and \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. +% The available modes are: +% t = top margin (top of the footer text to the bottom of the main text) +% b = bottom margin (bottom of the footer text to the bottom of page) +% c = vertically centered between the main text and the bottom of the page, +% with the given offset +% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset +% For the offsets, positive values move the footer downward. +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip, \topmargin, and \textheight should be set +% properly before calling this function. +\def\IEEEsetfootermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetfootermargin}{\@IEEEsetfootermargin[\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext]}} +\def\@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}} +\def\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax +\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax +% check for mode errors +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax +\else + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi +\fi +% handle each mode +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax + % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment + % value as is. The end adjustment of \footskip will do all that + % is needed +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax + % calculate the bottom margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin + % now subtract off the footer top margin + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom + % and top footer margins + % our adjustment must be half this value to center the footer + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax + % add to the offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax + % calculate the bottom margin + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin + % get the difference between the actual and the desired + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\else + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax + \else + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak + Defaulting to `t'}% + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax + \fi + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer top margin + % get the difference between the desired and the actual + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB +\fi\fi % if t, b, c +\fi % if a +% advance \footskip by the needed amount +\advance\footskip by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax +} + +% -- End V1.8a page setup commands -- + + + + + +% V1.6 +% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations +% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise +% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox +% warning. The author may still have to tweak things, +% but the appearance will be much better "right out +% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. +% TeX default is 50 +\hyphenpenalty=750 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\hyphenpenalty 500 +\fi +% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. +% The TeX default is 1000 +\hbadness=1350 +% The IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation +\frenchspacing + +% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks +\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700 +\relpenalty=800 % default 500 + +% v1.8a increase these to discourage widows and orphans +\clubpenalty=1000 % default 150 +\widowpenalty=1000 % default 150 +\displaywidowpenalty=1000 % default 50 + + +% margin note stuff +\marginparsep 10pt +\marginparwidth 20pt +\marginparpush 25pt + + +% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch +\lineskip 0pt +\normallineskip 0pt +\lineskiplimit 0pt +\normallineskiplimit 0pt + +% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the +% footline +\footskip 0.4in + +% normally zero, should be relative to font height. +% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes) +\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex + +\parindent 1.0em +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \parindent 1.5em +\fi + +\headheight 12pt +\headsep 18pt +% use the normal font baselineskip +% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch +\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip + + +% V1.8 \maxdepth defaults to 4pt, but should be font size dependent +\maxdepth=0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt + +% set the default top margin to 58pt +% which results in a \topmargin of -49.59pt for 10pt documents +\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{58pt} +% tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/column. +% standard is: 9pt/63 lpc; 10pt/58 lpc; 11pt/52 lpc; 12pt/50 lpc +\IEEEquantizetextheight{c} +% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom +\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} + + +\columnsep 1pc +\textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc + +% set the default side margins to center the text +\IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} + + +% adjust margins for default conference mode +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference + \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt) + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.75in} + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. + % standard is: 9pt/61 lpc; 10pt/56 lpc; 11pt/50 lpc; 12pt/48 lpc + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} +\fi + + +% compsoc text sizes, margins and spacings +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \columnsep 12bp + % CS specs for \textwdith are 6.875in + % \textwidth 6.875in + % however, measurements from proofs show they are using 3.5in columns + \textwidth 7in + \advance\textwidth by \columnsep + % set the side margins to center the text + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} + % top/bottom margins to center + % could just set \textheight to 9.75in for all the different paper sizes + % and then quantize, but we'll do it the long way here to allow for easy + % future per-paper size adjustments + \IEEEsettextheight{0.625in}{0.625in}% 11in - 2 * 0.625in = 9.75in is the standard text height for compsoc journals + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.625in} + \if@IEEEusingcspaper + \IEEEsettextheight{0.5in}{0.5in}% 10.75in - 2 * 0.5in = 9.75in + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.5in} + \fi + \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper + \IEEEsettextheight{24.675mm}{24.675mm}% 297mm - 2 * 24.675mm = 247.650mm (9.75in) + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{24.675mm} + \fi + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. + % standard is: 9pt/65 lpc; 10pt/61 lpc; 11pt/53 lpc; 12pt/49 lpc + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} + +% compsoc conference + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference + % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep + \columnsep 0.25in + \IEEEsettextwidth{0.75in}{0.75in} + % set the side margins to center the text (0.75in for letterpaper) + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} + % compsoc conferences want 1in top and bottom margin + \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in} + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in} + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. + % standard is: 9pt/58 lpc; 10pt/53 lpc; 11pt/48 lpc; 12pt/46 lpc + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} + \fi +\fi + + + +% draft mode settings override that of all other modes +% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra +% space between the lines for editor's comments +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type + \IEEEsettextwidth{1in}{1in} + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt} + % want 1in top and bottom margins + \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in} + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in} + % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines. + % this may cause the top and bottom margins to be off a tad + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c} + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp} +\fi + + + +% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin +% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner. +\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} + \fi +\fi + +\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer. + \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} + \fi + \IEEEsettextwidth{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} + \IEEEsetsidemargin{i}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and + outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} +\fi + + + +% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin +% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin +\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} + \fi +\fi + +\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined +\else + % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin + \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined + \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} + \fi + \IEEEsettextheight{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and + bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} +\fi + + + +% default to center header and footer text in the margins +\IEEEsetheadermargin{c}{0pt} +\IEEEsetfootermargin{c}{0pt} + +% adjust header and footer positions for compsoc journals +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \ifCLASSOPTIONjournal + \IEEEsetheadermargin{b}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} + \IEEEsetfootermargin{t}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} + \fi +\fi + + +% V1.8a display lines per column info message on user's console +\def\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\textheight +% topskip represents only one line even if > baselineskip +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -1\topskip +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip +% need to add one line to include topskip (first) line +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 1 +% save lines per column value as text +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB} +% backout topskip advance to allow direct \@IEEEtrantmpcountA comparison +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by -1 +% restore value as text height (without topskip) rather than just as number of lines +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip +% is the column height an integer number of lines per column? +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpcountB +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{exact} +\else +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{approximate, difference = \the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA} +\fi +\typeout{-- Lines per column: \@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt\space (\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt).}} +% delay execution till start of document to allow for user changes +\AtBeginDocument{\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn} + + + +% LIST SPACING CONTROLS + +% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing +% above and below \trivlist +% Both \list and IED lists override this. +% However, \trivlist will use this as will most +% things built from \trivlist like the \center +% environment. +\topsep 0.5\baselineskip + +% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded +% or followed by blank lines. the IEEE does not increase +% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero. +% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster. +\partopsep \z@ + +% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. +% The IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs +% so this is also zero. +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to +% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists). +\parsep \z@ + +% Controls the extra spacing between list items. +% The IEEE does not put extra spacing between items. +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect +% lists (but not IED lists). +\itemsep \z@ + +% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list +% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter +% it, you have to do so when you call the \list. +% However, the IEEE uses this for the theorem environment +% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below +\itemindent -1em + +% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to +% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list. +% Hence this statement does nothing for lists. +% But, quote and verse do use it for indention. +\leftmargin 2em + +% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list +% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and +% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they +% all are overridden. +\leftmargini 2em +%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used. +%\leftmargini 0em +\leftmarginii 1em +\leftmarginiii 1.5em +\leftmarginiv 1.5em +\leftmarginv 1.0em +\leftmarginvi 1.0em +\labelsep 0.5em +\labelwidth \z@ + + +% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained. +% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the +% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the +% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). +% \topsep is now 2pt as the IEEE puts a little extra space around +% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list. +% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in +% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes +% of these values DO affect \list +% +\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} +\let\@listI\@listi +\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} +\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi% + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} + + +% The IEEE uses 5) not 5. +\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} + +% The IEEE uses a) not (a) +\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} + +% The IEEE uses iii) not iii. +\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} + +% The IEEE uses A) not A. +\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} + +% exactly the same as in article.cls +\def\p@enumii{\theenumi} +\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} +\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} + +% itemized list label styles +\def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$} +\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}} +\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$} +\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$} + + + +% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS **** +% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls +% *************************** +% +% +% The IEEE seems to use at least two different values by +% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right +% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal +% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use +% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications +% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. +% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose +% which one you like in your document using a command such as: +% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA +\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent + +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB +\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent +% However, we'll default to using \parindent +% which makes more sense to me +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent +\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA + + +% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels +% are indented to the right. +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention +\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent +\IEEEelabelindent \parindent + +% This controls the default amount the description list labels +% are indented to the right. +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention +\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent +\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent + +% This is the value actually used within the IED lists. +% The IED environments automatically set its value to +% one of the three values above, so global changes do +% not have any effect +\newdimen\IEEElabelindent +\IEEElabelindent \parindent + +% The actual amount labels will be indented is +% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below +% corresponding to the level of nesting depth +% This provides a means by which the user can +% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper +% levels +% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" +% values. What the IEEE actually does may depend on the specific +% circumstances. +% The first list level almost always has full indention. +% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation +% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing +% that they don't use any indentation. +\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} + +% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto +% set to one of the 6 values above +% global changes here have no effect +\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0} + +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED +% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for +% the labels. +% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later +% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted +% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty +\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep +\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em + +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED +% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for +% the labels (nomenclature lists). The IEEE usually increases the +% spacing in these cases +\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep +\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em + +% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and +% below each IED list. the IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing +% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. +% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later +% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted +% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty +\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep +\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt + + +% This command is executed within each IED list environment +% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the +% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing +% global parameters that affect things other than lists. +% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} +% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until +% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. +\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax} + +% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based +% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent +% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} +% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: +% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} + +% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the +% width of the given text. It is the same as +% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} +% and useful as a shorter alternative. +% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width +% of the longest label in the list +\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} + +% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the +% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal +% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via +% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list +% environments. +\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} + +% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically +% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep +% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin +% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) +% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list +% environments to have an effect. +\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin +\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse + +% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by +% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level. +% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option +% of the IED list environments to have an effect. +\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor +\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse + + +% internal variable to indicate type of IED label +% justification +% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right +\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0} + + +% commands to allow the user to control IED +% label justifications. Use these commands within +% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl +% Note that changing the normal list justifications +% is nonstandard and the IEEE may not like it if you do so! +% I include these commands as they may be helpful to +% those who are using these enhanced list controls for +% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. +% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right +% justification, description defaults to left. +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right + + + + +% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies +% this allows us to set all the list parameters within +% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) +% from overriding any of our parameters +% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% +\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% +\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% +\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% +\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% +\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} + +% Note controlled spacing here +\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% +\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% +\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% +\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% +\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% +\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% +\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% +\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% +\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% +\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} + + +% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments +% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description +% which must be created by the base classes +% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate +\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize +\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize +\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate +\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate + +% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls +\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription} + {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin + \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} + {\endlist} +\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep + \normalfont\bfseries #1} + + +% override LaTeX's default IED lists +\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} +\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} +\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} +\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} +\def\description{\@IEEEdescription} +\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} + +% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that +% override itemize, enumerate, or description +\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} +\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} +\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} +\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} +\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} +\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} + + +% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal +% commands so they are protected against redefinition +\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} +\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} +\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} +\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% + \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + \advance\@itemdepth\@ne% + \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% + % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent% + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % calculate the label width + % the user can override this later if + % they specified a \labelwidth + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% + \fi}\fi\fi}% + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% + \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + \advance\@enumdepth\@ne% + \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% + % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent% + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % calculate the label width + % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using + % normalfont 1) to 9) + % The user can override this later + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% + \fi}\fi\fi}% + + +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS +% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % +\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% + % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default + % set other defaults + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% + % assume normal labelsep + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% + \partopsep 0ex% + \parsep 0ex% + \itemsep 0ex% + \rightmargin 0em% + \listparindent 0em% + \itemindent 0em% + % Bogus label width in case the user forgets + % to set it. + % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you + % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to + % display it on the screen during compilation + % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out + % which label is the widest) + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters + \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes + % to our globals + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters + #1\relax% + % If the user has requested not to use the + % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% + \fi% + % Unless the user has requested otherwise, + % calculate our left margin based + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and + % \labelsep + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax% + \fi}\fi} + +% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. +\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax +\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else +\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax +\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else +\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} + + +% compsoc uses a larger value for the normal labelsep +% and also extra spacing above and below each list +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \IEEEiednormlabelsep 1.2em + \IEEEiedtopsep 6pt plus 3pt minus 3pt +\fi + + +% VERSE and QUOTE +% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment +\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr + \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax} + {\endlist} +\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax} + {\endlist} +\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax} + {\endlist} + + +% \titlepage +% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct +% way to create the title page. +\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn + \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} +\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} + +% standard values from article.cls +\arraycolsep 5pt +\arrayrulewidth .4pt +\doublerulesep 2pt + +\tabcolsep 6pt +\tabbingsep 0.5em + + +%% FOOTNOTES +% +%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt +% V1.6 respond to changes in font size +% space added above the footnotes (if present) +\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip + +% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes +% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in +% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep +% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed +% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since +% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7\baselineskip +% above the baseline and 0.3\baselineskip below it, we need to +% use 0.7\baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing +% between all the lines of the footnotes. The IEEE often uses a tad +% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps +% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran +% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle. +{\footnotesize +\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip} + + +\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins +\fboxsep = 3pt +\fboxrule = .4pt +% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark +% Note that the IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need +% box resizing tricks here. +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em +% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }} +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1} +\fi + +% The IEEE does not use footnote rules +\def\footnoterule{} + +% V1.7 for compsoc, the IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot" +% system to implement this. +\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule +\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule +\kern-5pt +\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} +\kern4.6pt +\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse +\else +\relax +\fi} +\fi + +% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages +\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 + +% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations +% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000, +% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100. +\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 + +% default allows section depth up to /paragraph +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} + +% technotes do not allow /paragraph +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} +\fi +% neither do compsoc conferences +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}} + + +\newcounter{section} +\newcounter{subsection}[section] +\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] +\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection] + +% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may +% have their own, different, implementations +\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] + +% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents +\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1 +\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% compsoc is all arabic +\def\thesection{\arabic{section}} +\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}} +\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} +\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} +\else +\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I +% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - +\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A +% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by the IEEE rather than I-A.1 +\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1 +\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a +\fi + +% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to +% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks. +% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but +% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions. +\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}% +\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax} + + +% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings) +% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes +% in the former to automatically appear in the latter +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} + \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.} + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.} + \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.} + \else% compsoc not conferencs + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection} + \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}} + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}} + \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}} + \fi +\else% not compsoc + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I. + \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B. + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3) + \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d) +\fi + +% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum +\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) +% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray +\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) +% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on +% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis +\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis} + + + +% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does +\def\contentsname{Contents} +\def\listfigurename{List of Figures} +\def\listtablename{List of Tables} +\def\refname{References} +\def\indexname{Index} +\def\figurename{Fig.} +\def\tablename{TABLE} +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}} +\def\partname{Part} +\def\appendixname{Appendix} +\def\abstractname{Abstract} +% IEEE specific names +\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Index Terms} +\def\IEEEproofname{Proof} + + +% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS +% +\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} +\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em} +\def\@dotsep{4.5} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} + +% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily +% collide with the section titles. +% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders. +% MDS 1/2001 +\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}} +\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}% + \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth% + \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par% + \endgroup} +% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep +\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}} +\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}} +% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth +% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents +% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are! +\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}} +\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}} +\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}} +\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}} +\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}} +\let\l@table\l@figure + + +% Definitions for floats +% +% Normal Floats +% V1.8 floatsep et al. revised down by 0.15\baselineskip +% to account for the sideeffects of \topskip compensation +\floatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip +\textfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip +\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil +\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil +\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil +\def\topfraction{0.9} +\def\bottomfraction{0.4} +\def\floatpagefraction{0.8} +% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page +\def\textfraction{0.1} + +% Double Column Floats +\dblfloatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip + +\dbltextfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip +% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e. +% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best +% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable +% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and +% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with +% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex +% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998. +% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't +% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing. + +\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil +\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil +\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil +\def\dbltopfraction{0.8} +\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8} +\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4} + +\intextsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip +\setcounter{topnumber}{2} +\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} +\setcounter{totalnumber}{4} + + + +% article class provides these, we should too. +\newlength\abovecaptionskip +\newlength\belowcaptionskip +% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table +% captions +\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip} +% compsoc journals are a little more generous +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal + \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.75\baselineskip} +\fi\fi +\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt} +% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be +% overridden by a user +\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% +\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% + + +% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments +% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref. +\def\@IEEEtablestring{table} + + +% V1.8 compensate for \topskip so top of top figures align with tops of the first lines of main text +% here we calculate a space equal to the amount \topskip exceeds the main text height +% we hook in at \@floatboxreset +\def\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace{\ifdim\prevdepth=-1000pt\relax +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{1\topskip}\relax +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-0.7\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\relax +\vspace*{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\fi} +% V1.8 compensate for \topskip at the top of top tables so caption text is on main text baseline +% use a strut set on the caption baseline within \@makecaption +\def\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\ifdim\prevdepth=-1000pt\rule{0pt}{\topskip}\fi} +% the \ifdim\prevdepth checks are always expected to be true for IEEE style float caption ordering +% because top of figure content and top of captions in tables is the first thing on the vertical +% list of these floats +% thanks to Donald Arseneau for his 2000/11/11 post "Re: caption hacking" with info on this topic. + + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% +% test if is a for a figure or table +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% +% if a table, do table caption +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace +% if not a table, format it as a figure +\else +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}% +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}% +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% +% if caption is shorter than a line, center +\else% +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\fi\fi} +% +\else% nonconference compsoc +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% +% test if is a for a figure or table +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% +% if a table, do table caption +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace +% if not a table, format it as a figure +\else +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}% +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}% +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% +% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify +\else% +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\fi\fi} +\fi +% +\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% +% test if is a for a figure or table +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% +% if a table, do table caption +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace +% if not a table, format it as a figure +\else +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace +% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\nobreakspace #2}% +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\nobreakspace}% +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% +% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise +\else% +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% +\fi\fi\fi} +\fi + + + +% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label +% within \caption +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering{\footnotesize #1}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup% +\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label +\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax +\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}% +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}% +\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave +\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi} +\fi + + +% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with +% preview-latex +\newcounter{figure} +\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} +\def\fps@figure{tbp} +\def\ftype@figure{1} +\def\ext@figure{lof} +\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\nobreakspace\thefigure} +% V1.8 within figures add \@IEEEfiguretopskipspace compensation to LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset +\def\figure{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\normalsize\@setminipage\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace}\@float{figure}} +\def\endfigure{\end@float} +% V1.8 also add \@IEEEfiguretopskipspace compensation to \figure* +\@namedef{figure*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\normalsize\@setminipage\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace}\@dblfloat{figure}} +\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} + +\newcounter{table} +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\thetable{\arabic{table}} +\else +\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table} +\fi +\def\fps@table{tbp} +\def\ftype@table{2} +\def\ext@table{lot} +\def\fnum@table{\tablename\nobreakspace\thetable} +% V1.6 The IEEE uses 8pt text for tables +% within tables alter LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset to use \footnotesize +\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}} +\def\endtable{\end@float} +% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well. +\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}} +\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} + + + + +%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- +%% V1.8a + +% usage: \@IEEEstripouterbraces*{} +% \@IEEEstripouterbraces fully expands its argument (which it then stores +% in \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg) via \edef, then removes any outer enclosing +% braces, and finally stores the result in the macro +% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEstripouterbraces{{{{ab}c}}} +% results in: +% +% \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg ==> a macro containing {{{ab}c}} +% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces ==> a macro containing {ab}c +% +% the *-star form,\@IEEEstripouterbraces*, does not expand the argument +% contents during processing +\def\@IEEEstripouterbraces{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\edef\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}} + +\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1{\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg{#1}\relax +% If the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single delimited +% argument, we know we have one sequence of tokens without any enclosing +% braces. Loop until this is true. +\loop + \expandafter\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER +\ifx\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg +\else + \let\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces +\repeat} + +\def\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces{#1}} + + + +% usage: \@IEEEextractgroup*{} +% \@IEEEextractgroup fully expands its argument (which it then stores in +% \@IEEEextractgrouparg) via \edef and then assigns the first "brace group" +% of tokens to the macro \@IEEEextractedgroup. +% The remaining groups, if any, are stored in the macro +% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain. If the argument does not contain the requisite +% groups, the respective macros will be defined to be empty. +% There is an asymmetry in that \@IEEEextractedgroup is stripped of its first +% outer grouping while \@IEEEextractedgroupremain retains even the outer +% grouping (if present) that originally identified it as a group. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEextractgroup{{{ab}}{c{de}}} +% results in: +% +% \@IEEEextractgrouparg ==> a macro containing {{ab}}{c{de}} +% \@IEEEextractedgroup ==> a macro containing {ab} +% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain ==> a macro containing {c{de}} +% +% The *-star form, \@IEEEextractgroup*, does not expand its argument +% contents during processing. +\def\@IEEEextractgroup{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\def\@@IEEEextractgroup}{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\edef\@@IEEEextractgroup}} + +\def\@@IEEEextractgroup#1{\@IEEEextractgroupdef\@IEEEextractgrouparg{#1}\relax +% trap the case of an empty extracted group as this would cause problems with +% \@IEEEextractgroupremain's argument acquisition +\ifx\@IEEEextractgrouparg\@empty + \def\@IEEEextractedgroup{}\relax + \def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{}\relax +\else + % We have to use some dirty tricks here. We want to insert {} around + % whatever remains after the first group so that TeX's argument scanner + % will preserve any originally enclosing braces as well as provide an + % empty argument to acquire even if there isn't a second group. + % In this first of two dirty tricks, we put a } at the end of the structure + % we are going to extract from. The \ifnum0=`{\fi keeps TeX happy to allow + % what would otherwise be an unbalanced macro definition for + % \@@IEEEextractgroup to be acceptable to it. + \ifnum0=`{\fi\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroupremain\@IEEEextractgrouparg}\relax +\fi} + +% In the second part of the dirty tricks, we insert a leading { right after +% the first group is acquired, but before the remainder is. Again, the +% \ifnum0=`}\fi keeps TeX happy during definition time, but will disappear +% during run time. +\def\@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroup{#1}\expandafter\@@IEEEextractgroupremain\expandafter{\ifnum0=`}\fi} + +\def\@@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{#1}} + + + +% \@IEEEextracttoken relocated at top because margin setting commands rely on it + + + +% usage: \@IEEEextracttokengroups*{} +% \@IEEEextracttokengroups fully expands its argument (which it then stores +% in \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg) and then assigns the first "brace group" of +% tokens (with the outermost braces removed) to the macro +% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup. +% The meaning of the first nonbrace (but including the empty group) token +% within this first group is assigned via \let to \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken +% as well as stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro. If a first +% nonbrace token does not exist (or is an empty group), these will be \relax +% and empty, respectively. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during +% the acquisition of the first token in the first group are stored in +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded, however their original relative brace +% nesting depths are not guaranteed to be preserved. +% The first group within this first group is stored in the macro +% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup. +% Likewise for the next group after the first: \@IEEEextractednextgroup, +% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup, \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttoken, +% \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttokenmacro, and +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded. +% All tokens/groups after the first group, including any enclosing braces, +% are stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain which will +% be empty if none exist. +% +% For example: +% \@IEEEextracttokengroups{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}} +% will result in: +% +% \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g} +% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup ==> a macro containing {ab}{cd} +% \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain ==> a macro containing {{ef}g} +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken ==> the letter a +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing a +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd +% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ab +% \@IEEEextractednextgroup ==> a macro containing {ef}g +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken ==> the letter e +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing e +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing fg +% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ef +% +% If given an empty argument, \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken and +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken will be set to \relax +% and all the macros will be empty. +% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttokengroups*, does not expand its argument +% contents during processing. +% +% Depends on: \@IEEEextractgroup, \@IEEEextracttoken +\def\@IEEEextracttokengroups{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}} +\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups#1{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg{#1}\relax +% begin extraction, these functions are safe with empty arguments +% first group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup +\let\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain\@IEEEextractedgroupremain +\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded +% first first group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup +% next group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractednextgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup +\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded +% next first group +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup} + + +%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions -- + + + + +%% +%% START OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS +%% +%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX +%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, +%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, +%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. +%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) + + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form +\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse + +\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter +% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray +% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both +\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue + +\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined +\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used + + +% The default math style used by the columns +\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} +% The default text style used by the columns +% default to using the current font +\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} + +% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray +\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} + + + +% V1.8 flags to indicate that equation numbering is to persist +\newif\if@IEEEeqnumpersist% +\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse +\newif\if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% +\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse +% +% V1.8 flags to indicate if (sub)equation number of last line was preadvanced +\newif\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv% +\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse +\newif\if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv% +\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse + +\newcount\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback% saves previous value of IEEEsubequation number in case we need to restore it + +% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber +% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package +% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as +% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. +% This command is intended for use in non-IEEEeqnarray math environments +\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} + + +% IEEEyes/nonumber +% V1.8 add persistant * forms +% These commands can alter the type of equation an IEEEeqnarray line is. +\def\IEEEyesnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEeqnumpersisttrue\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEyesnumber}{\@IEEEyesnumber}} + +\def\@IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray +\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax + \stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label +\fi +% even if we reached this eqn num via a preadv, it is legit now +\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse +\fi} + +\def\IEEEnonumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\global\@eqnswfalse}{\global\@eqnswfalse}} + + +\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersisttrue\@IEEEyessubnumber}{\@IEEEyessubnumber}} +% +\def\@IEEEyessubnumber{\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray + \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax% if it already is a subequation, we are good to go as-is + \else% if we are a regular equation we have to watch out for two cases + \if@IEEEeqnumpreadv% if this equation is the result of a preadvance, backout and bump the sub eqnnum + \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne\global\c@IEEEsubequation=\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback\addtocounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\relax + \else% non-preadvanced equations just need initialization of their sub eqnnum + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\relax + \fi + \fi% fi already is subequation + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label + \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% no longer a preadv anymore + \global\@eqnswtrue +\fi} + + +\def\IEEEnosubnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEnosubnumber}{\@IEEEnosubnumber}} +% +\def\@IEEEnosubnumber{\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray + \if@eqnsw % we do nothing unless we know we will display because we play with the counters here + % if it currently is a subequation, bump up to the next equation number and turn off the subequation + \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax\addtocounter{equation}{1}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\relax + \fi + \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% no longer a preadv anymore + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label + \fi +\fi} + + + +% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers +\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} + +% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments +% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the +% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} +\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}\relax +% check if column is defined for the precolumn definition +% We have to be careful here because TeX scans for & even within an \iffalse +% where it does not expand macros. So, if we used only one \ifx and a #3 +% appeared in the false branch and the user inserted another alignment +% structure that uses & in the \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{}, TeX will not see that +% there is an inner alignment in the false branch yet still will see any & +% there and will think that they apply to the outer alignment resulting in an +% incomplete \ifx error. +% So, here we use separate checks for the pre and post parts in order to keep +% the #3 outside of all conditionals. +\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined\relax +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname +\else% if not, error and use default type +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak +Using a default centering column instead}% +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname +\fi +% The ten \relax are to help prevent misleading error messages in case a user +% accidently inserted a macro that tries to acquire additional arguments. +#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax +% check if column is defined for the postcolumn definition +\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined\relax +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname +\else% if not, use the default type +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname +\fi +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} + +% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray +\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} + + +% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} + + +% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} + + +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types + + +% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list +% used to build up the \halign preamble +\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% +\@@IEEEappendtoksA} + +% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument +% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register +\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% +\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% +\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} + +% define some common column types for the user +% math +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} +% text +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} + +% vertical rules +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% +{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} + +% horizontal rules +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} + +% plain +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} + +% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} + + +% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} +% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} + +% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column +% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue + + + +% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell +% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] +% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. +\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} + +% creates a blank separator row +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% +% get the skip value, based on the font commands +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% +\else% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% +\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + +% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% +% get the skip value, based on the font commands +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% +\else% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% +\fi% +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + + + +% draws a single rule across all the columns optional +% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] +\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule +% turn off any struts +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} + + +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then +% another single rule row +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% +\else% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% +\fi% +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +} + +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then +% another single rule row +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% +\else% +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% +\fi% +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% +\else% +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% +\fi% +} + + + +% inserts a full row's worth of &'s +% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns +% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% +\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all +\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% +\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count +\repeat% +\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s +} + + + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines +\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray + +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth + +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used + + + +% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% save values +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} + +% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% restore values +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} + + +% globally restores the strut height and depth to the +% master values and sets the master strut flag to true +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% remove stretchability +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% restore values +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} + + +% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current +% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth +% and the use master strut flag, global +% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried +% into the isolation/strut column +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% +\fi} + + + +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height +% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside +% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut +% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut +% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip +% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current +% font is used. +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\else% arg one present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\else% arg two present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +% remove stretchability, just to be safe +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master +\else% outer, have to set master strut too +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut +\fi} + + +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height +% and depth to both the master and local struts. +% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth +% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use +% of the local strut values. +% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current +% font is used. +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% +\skip0=0pt\relax% +\else% arg one present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% +\skip0=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% +\skip2=0pt\relax% +\else% arg two present +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% +\skip2=\skip3\relax% +\fi% if null arg +% remove stretchability, just to be safe +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size +% get local strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% +% add it to the user supplied values +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% +% update the local strut size +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master +\else% outer, have to set master strut too +% get master strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +% add it to the user supplied values +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% +% update the local and master strut sizes +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut +\fi} + + +% allow user a way to see the struts +\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts +\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse + +% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut +% get master strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% +\else% +% get local strut size +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% +\fi% +% remove stretchability, probably not needed +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth +% allow user to see struts if desired +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% +\else% +\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} + + +% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray +% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. +% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] +% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] +% blank arguments inherit the default values +% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 +\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} +\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} +\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% +\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% +\else% +\skip0=#1\relax% +\fi% +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% +\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% +\else% +\skip2=#2\relax% +\fi% +% remove stretchability, probably not needed +\dimen0\skip0\relax% +\dimen2\skip2\relax% +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts% +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% +\else% +\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} + + +% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the +% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% +\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} + + +% equation and subequation forms to use to setup hyperref's \@currentHref +\def\@IEEEtheHrefequation{equation.\theHequation} +\def\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation{equation.\theHequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} + + +\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnumpersisttrue\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} +\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} + +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} + + +% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. +% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. +% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} +\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} +% We have to be careful here to normalize catcodes just before acquiring the +% cols as that specification may contain punctuation which could be subject +% to document catcode changes. +\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]{\begingroup\IEEEnormalcatcodes\@@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]} +\def\@@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{\endgroup + % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not + % the star form was involked + \if@IEEEeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue + \else% not the star form + \global\@eqnswfalse + \fi% if star form + % provide a basic hyperref \theHequation if this has not already been setup (hyperref not loaded, or no section counter) + \@ifundefined{theHequation}{\def\theHequation{\arabic{equation}}}{}\relax + % provide dummy hyperref commands in case hyperref is not loaded + \providecommand{\Hy@raisedlink}[1]{}\relax + \providecommand{\hyper@anchorstart}[1]{}\relax + \providecommand{\hyper@anchorend}{}\relax + \providecommand{\@currentHref}{}\relax + \@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse% reset eqnpreadv flag + \@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% reset subeqnpreadv flag + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it + \lineskip=0pt\relax + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% + \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build + %V1.8 Here we preadvance to the next equation number. + % If the user later wants a continued subequation, we can roll back. + \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation% + \stepcounter{equation}\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue% advance equation counter before first line + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet + \let\@IEEEcurrentlabelsave\@currentlabel% save current label as we later change it globally + \let\@IEEEcurrentHrefsave\@currentHref% save current href label as we later change it globally + \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label + \def\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label + \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line + \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#2}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + % put in the column for the equation number + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first + \toks0={##}% + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% + % add the isolation column + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% + % add the equation number col to the preamble + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% + % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax + % begin the display alignment + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines + $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup + % "exspand" the preamble + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} + +% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use +% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, +% restore counters (to backout any equation setup for a next line that was never used) +% to their correct values and exit +\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup +\if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi +\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne\global\c@IEEEsubequation=\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback\fi +\global\let\@currentlabel\@IEEEcurrentlabelsave% restore current label +\global\let\@currentHref\@IEEEcurrentHrefsave% restore current href label +$$\@ignoretrue} + + +% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to +% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] +% These "cr" macros are modified versions of those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column +% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column + {\ifnum0=`}\fi + \@ifstar{% + \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR + }{% + \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR + }% +} + +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} + +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% + \ifnum0=`{\fi}% + \@@IEEEeqnarraycr + \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% + +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak + environment}% + {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarray column\MessageBreak + specifications.}\relax% + \else + \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count + \repeat + % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column + \fi + % execute the &'s + \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% + % handle the strut/isolation column + \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray + &% and enter the equation number column + \if@eqnsw% only if we display something + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}}% start a hyperref anchor + \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\relax% displaying an equation number means + \global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse\relax% the equation counters point to valid equations + % V1.8 Here we setup the counters, currentlabel and status for what would be the *next* + % equation line as would be the case under the current settings. However, there are two problems. + % One problem is that there might not ever be a next line. The second problem is that the user + % may later alter the meaning of a line with commands such as \IEEEyessubnumber. So, to handle + % these cases we have to record the current values of the (sub)equation counters and revert back + % to them if the next line is changed or never comes. The \if@IEEEeqnumpreadv, \if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv + % and \@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback stuff tracks this. + % The logic to handle all this is surprisingly complex, but a nice feature of the approach here is + % that the equation counters and labels remain valid for what the line would be unless a + % \IEEEyessubnumber et al. later changes it. So, any hyperref links are always correct. + \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax% handle subequation + \theIEEEsubequationdis\relax + \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% setup for default type of next line + \stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvtrue\relax + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label + \else + % if no subeqnum persist, go ahead and setup for a new equation number + \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation + \stepcounter{equation}\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue\relax + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label + \fi + \else% display a standard equation number + \theequationdis\relax + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\relax% not really needed + \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% setup for default type of next line + % subequations that follow plain equations carry the same equation number e.g, 5, 5a rather than 5, 6a + \stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvtrue\relax + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label + \else + % if no subeqnum persist, go ahead and setup for a new equation number + \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation + \stepcounter{equation}\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue\relax + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label + \fi + \fi% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorend}% end hyperref anchor + \fi% fi only if we display something + % reset the flags to indicate the default preferences of the display of equation numbers + \if@IEEEeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue\else\global\@eqnswfalse\fi + \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue\fi% ditto for the subequation flag + % reset the number of columns the user actually used + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax + % the real end of the line + \cr} + + + + + +% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything +% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second +% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, +% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox +% within an hbox. +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within +% a \hbox{$ $} construct. +% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. +% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - +% natural width is the default. +% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% +\@IEEEeqnarraybox} +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} + +% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} +% for \vcenter in non-math mode +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% +\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse + +\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} +% We have to be careful here to normalize catcodes just before acquiring the +% cols as that specification may contain punctuation which could be subject +% to document catcode changes. +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\begingroup\IEEEnormalcatcodes\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} +\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} + +% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs +\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\endgroup\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign + \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it + \lineskip=0pt\relax% + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% + \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build + \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing + \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#4}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA + % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first + \toks0={##}% + % add the isolation column to the preamble + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax + % begin the alignment + \everycr{}% + % use only the very first token to determine the positioning + \@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarraybox position specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax + \fi + % \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are ignored + % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now + \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% + % use the appropriate vbox type + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax% + \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines + \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% + \bgroup + % "exspand" the preamble + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} + +% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, +% exit from math mode if needed, and exit +\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status +&% enter isolation/strut column +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed +\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values +% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray +% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox +\crcr\egroup\egroup% +% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed +\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} + + + +% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to +% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray +% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column +% carry strut status into isolation/strut column +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status +&% enter isolation/strut column +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed +% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% +{\ifnum0=`}\fi% +\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} + +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} + +% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% +\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} + + + +% usage: \@IEEEbuildpreamble{column specifiers} +% starts the halign preamble build +% the assembled preamble is put in \@IEEEtrantmptoksA +\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble#1{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start +\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known +% ensure these are valid +\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition +% currently acquired numerically referenced glue +% use a name that is easier to remember +\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0% +% tracks number of columns in the preamble +\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% +% record the default end glues +\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% +\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% +\edef\@IEEEedefMACRO{#1}\relax% fully expand the preamble to support macro containers +% now parse the user's column specifications +% \ignorespaces is used as a delimiter, need at least one trailing \relax because +% \@@IEEEbuildpreamble looks into the future +\expandafter\@@IEEEbuildpreamble\@IEEEedefMACRO\ignorespaces\relax\relax} + + +% usage: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble{current column}{next column} +% parses and builds the halign preamble +\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% +% use only the very first token to check the end +\@IEEEextracttokengroups{#1}\relax +\ifx\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\ignorespaces\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% +% identify current and next token type +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next +% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% +% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% +% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% +% process the acquired glue +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% +% process the acquired col +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% +% ready prevtype for next col spec. +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% +% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group +\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} + + +% usage: \@@IEEEfinishpreamble{discarded} +% executed just after preamble build is completed +% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue +% argument is not used +\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax +\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% +{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% +\fi%num cols less than 1 +%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} + + +% usage: \@IEEEgetcoltype{col specifier}{\output}{error more} +% Identify and return the column specifier's type code in the given +% \output macro: +% n = number +% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) +% c = letter +% e = \ignorespaces (end of sequence) +% u = undefined +% error mode: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char +\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +% \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are discarded +\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtoken\ignorespaces\let#2=e\else +\ifcat\@IEEEextractedtoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences +\if0\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if1\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if2\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if3\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if4\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if5\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if6\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if7\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if8\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\if9\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else +\ifcat,\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=g\relax +\else\ifcat a\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi +\if#2u\relax +\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% +{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak +as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} + + +% usage: \@IEEEgetcurcol{col specifier} +% verify the letter referenced column exists +% and return its name in \@IEEEBPcurcolname +% if column specifier is invalid, use the default column @IEEEdefault +\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak +Using a default centering column instead}% +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} + + +% usage: \@IEEEgetcurglue{glue specifier}{\output} +% identify the predefined (punctuation) glue value +% and return it in the given output macro +\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% +% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) +% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) +% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) +% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) +% ' = \quad 1em +% " = \qquad 2em +% . = 0.5\arraycolsep +% / = \arraycolsep +% ? = 2\arraycolsep +% * = 1fil +% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter +% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero +% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 +% value for 1em. +% +% use only the very first token to determine the type +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else + \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarray predefined inter-column glue type specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax +\fi +% get the math font 1em value +% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs +% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. +% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure +% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, +% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. +% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. +{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% +% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% +% identify the glue value based on the first token +% we discard anything after the first +\if!\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if,\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if:\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if;\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if'\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if"\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if.\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if/\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else +\if?\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else +\if *\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else +\if+\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else +\if-\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else +\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak +0pt instead}% +{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak +IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} + + +% usage: \@IEEEprocessNcol{digit} +% process a numerical digit from the column specification +% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value +% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired +\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak +after the first}% +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% +\else% if we previously aborted a glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion +\else%acquire this number +% save the previous type before the numerical digits started +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% +\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% +\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition +\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% +\else%user glue not defined +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak +0pt instead}% +{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak +\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% +\fi% glue defined or not +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition +\fi%close acquisition, get glue +\fi%discard or acquire number +\fi%prevtype glue or not +} + + +% process an acquired glue +% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble +\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions +\else +% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else +% as this is not used in the preamble, but before +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% +\else%not the start glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak +after the first}% +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue +\else% not a back to back glue +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi +\toks0={##}% +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi +% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand +% the column definition +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble +\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak +type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak +specifier}% +{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak +between column types.}% +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue +\fi% previous was a column +\fi% back-to-back glues +\fi% is start column glue +\fi% prev type not a +} + + +% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble +\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else +% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) +% so we must add this column to the preamble now +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue +\toks0={##}% +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi +% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand +% the column definition +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble +\fi%next type not numeral +\fi%next type not glue +} + + +%% +%% END OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS +%% + + + + + +% set up the running headers and footers +% +% header and footer font and size specifications +\def\@IEEEheaderstyle{\normalfont\scriptsize} +\def\@IEEEfooterstyle{\normalfont\scriptsize} +% +% compsoc uses sans-serif headers and footers +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \def\@IEEEheaderstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\scriptsize} + \def\@IEEEfooterstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\scriptsize} +\fi + + +% standard page style, ps@headings +\def\ps@headings{% default to standard twoside headers, no footers +% will change later if the mode requires otherwise +\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\rightmark\hfil\thepage}\relax +\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax +\let\@oddfoot\@empty +\let\@evenfoot\@empty +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote + % technote twoside + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax + \def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax +\fi +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + % draft footers + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax + \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax +\fi +% oneside +\if@twoside\else + % standard one side headers + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax + \let\@evenhead\@empty + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + % oneside draft footers + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax + \let\@evenfoot\@empty + \fi +\fi +% turn off headers for conferences +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference + \let\@oddhead\@empty + \let\@evenhead\@empty +\fi +% turn off footers for draftclsnofoot +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot + \let\@oddfoot\@empty + \let\@evenfoot\@empty +\fi} + + +% title page style, ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle +\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{% default title page headers, no footers +\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax +\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax +\let\@oddfoot\@empty +\let\@evenfoot\@empty +% will change later if the mode requires otherwise +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + % draft footers + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else + % but only if not draftclsnofoot + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax + \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax + \fi +\else + % all nondraft mode footers + \if@IEEEusingpubid + % for title pages that are using a pubid + % do not repeat pubid on the title page if using a peer review cover page + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else + % for noncompsoc papers, the pubid uses footnotesize and + % is at the same vertical position as where the last baseline would normally be + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + % for compsoc papers, the pubid is at the same vertical position as the normal footer + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax + \fi + \fi + \fi +\fi +% turn off headers for conferences +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference + \let\@oddhead\@empty + \let\@evenhead\@empty +\fi} + + +% peer review cover page style, ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle +\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% default peer review cover no headers, no footers +\let\@oddhead\@empty +\let\@evenhead\@empty +\let\@oddfoot\@empty +\let\@evenfoot\@empty +% will change later if the mode requires otherwise +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls + % draft footers + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else + % but only if not draftclsnofoot + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax + \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax + \fi +\else + % all nondraft mode footers + \if@IEEEusingpubid + % for peer review cover pages that are using a pubid + % for noncompsoc papers, the pubid uses footnotesize and + % is at the same vertical position as where the last baseline would normally be + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + % for compsoc papers, the pubid is at the same vertical position as the normal footer + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax + \fi + \fi +\fi} + + + +%% Defines the command for putting the header. +%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text +%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually +%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the +%% arguments to \markboth. +%% V1.7b add \protect to work with Babel +\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\MakeUppercase{\protect#1}}% +\def\rightmark{\MakeUppercase{\protect#2}}} + +\def\today{\ifcase\month\or + January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or + July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi + \space\number\day, \number\year} + + + + +%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS +%% +%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff +% +% +% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], [" +\def\@citex[#1]#2{% + \let\@citea\@empty + \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do + {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% + \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% + \G@refundefinedtrue + \@latex@warning + {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% + {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}} + +% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's +% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the +% following format controls are already defined and will not +% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the +% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" - +% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12] +% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}. +% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will +% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally +% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in +% that \cite. +% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments +% to produce the IEEE style. +\def\citepunct{], [} +\def\citedash{]--[} + +% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty +\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname} + +% V1.6 class files should always provide these +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} +\let\@openbib@code\@empty +% V1.8b article.cls is now providing these too +% we do not use \@mkboth, nor alter the page style +\newenvironment{theindex} + {\if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \let\item\@idxitem} + {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} +\newcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@} +\newcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}} +\newcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}} +\newcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax} + + + +% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. +% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in +% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty: +% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature} +% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak} +\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}} +\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack + \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% + \@esphack} + +% \IEEEnoauxwrite{} allows for citations that do not add to or affect +% the order of the existing citation list. Can be useful for \cite +% within \thanks{}. +\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEnoauxwrite}[1]{\relax +\if@filesw +\@fileswfalse +#1\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax +\@fileswtrue +\else +#1\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax +\fi} + +% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before +% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance +% the columns on the last page +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that + % the command is not executed +\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage} + +% allow the user to alter the triggered command +\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}} + +% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the +% command is executed +\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1% +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}% + +% trigger command at the given reference +\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% +\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi} + + +\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} + +% compsoc journals and conferences left align the reference numbers +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}} + +% controls bib item spacing +\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt} + +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} + + +\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% + % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger + \footnotesize\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% + \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% + \leftmargin\labelwidth + \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax + \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax + \usecounter{enumiv}% + \let\p@enumiv\@empty + \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% + \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem% + \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}% +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% +% originally: +% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% +% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more +% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference. +% The IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with +% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, +% but the final result will be much more like what the IEEE will publish. +% MDS 11/2000 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100% +\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi% + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax} +\let\endthebibliography=\endlist + + + + +% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS +% +% +% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author +% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font +\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}} + + +% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation. +% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote +% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} +% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you +% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote +% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks. +% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical +% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that +% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding +% with the text above. +% V1.7 make this a robust command +% V1.8 transmag uses an arabic author affiliation symbol +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize #1}}} +\else +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or% + \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger% + \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}} +\fi + + +% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS +% +% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize} +% The default if the user does not use an author block +\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} + +% adjustment spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode) +% can be negative +\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em} +% compsoc conferences need more space here +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}} + +% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +% This can be negative. +% The IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these +% controls in place in case they ever change their mind. +% Personally, I like 0.75ex. +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex} +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex} +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag +% transmag uses one line of space above first affiliation block +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{1\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} +\fi + +% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode) +% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make +% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the +% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, +% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep +% these above 2.6ex +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex} +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex} + +% This tracks the required strut size. +% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used. +\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex} + +% variables to retain font size and style across groups +% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m} +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n} + +% saves the current font attributes +\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series% +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape} + +% restores the saved font attributes +\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}% +\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}% +\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}% +\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}% +\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}% +\selectfont} + + +% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column +\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse + + +% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace +% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines +% within the halign environment. +% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above +% baseline portion at 70% of the total length. +% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch +\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace% +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}} + + +% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. +% Makes formatting easy for conferences +% +% use real definitions in conference mode +% name block +\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro +% do a spacer row if needed +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column +%restore the correct strut value +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}% +% input the author names +#1% +% end the row if the user did not already +\crcr} +% spacer row for names +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}} +% +% affiliation block +\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro +% do a spacer row if needed +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column +%restore the correct strut value +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}% +% input the author affiliations +#1% +% end the row if the user did not already +\crcr +% V1.8 transmag does not use any additional affiliation spacing after the first author +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0pt}\fi} + +% spacer row for affiliations +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}} + + +% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other +% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks. +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +\else + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else + % not conference, peerreviewca or transmag mode + \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\else + \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}% + \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}% + \fi + \fi +\fi + + + +% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular +\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style + \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% + \baselineskip=0pt\relax% + \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math + \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one + \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing + \everycr{}% ensure no problems here + \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet + \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space + \vtop\bgroup%vtop box + \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax + \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr} + +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox +\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup} + +% handle bogus star form +\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}} + +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[] +\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip} + +% end the line and do the optional spacer +\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}} + + + +% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages +\newif\if@IEEEWARNand +\@IEEEWARNandtrue + +% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a +% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid +% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes. +\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override + +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only + when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse} + +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% +\fi +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% +\fi +% V1.8 transmag uses conference author format +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% +\fi + +% page clearing command +% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles +% for the inserted blank pages +\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else +\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} + +% V1.8b hooks to allow adjustment of space above title +\def\IEEEtitletopspace{0.5\baselineskip} +% an added extra amount to allow for adjustment/offset +\def\IEEEtitletopspaceextra{0pt} + +% user command to invoke the title page +\def\maketitle{\par% + \begingroup% + \normalfont% + \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty + \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author + \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well. + \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines + \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info + % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc + \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}% + \normalsize% + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% + \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks% + \else + \if@twocolumn% + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% + \else + \twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@maketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}\@IEEEaftertitletext}]% + \fi + \else + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% + \fi + \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks% + \fi + % pullup page for pubid if used. + \if@IEEEusingpubid + \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}% + \fi + \endgroup + \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax + \gdef\@thanks{}% + % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers + % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}% + \let\thanks\relax} + + +% V1.8 parbox to format \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext +\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{1\textwidth}{#1}} +% V1.8 compsoc is partial width +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% comparison with proofs suggests it's in the range of 92.1-92.3% +\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.922\textwidth}{\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\rightskip\@flushglue\leftskip\z@skip}#1}} +\fi + +% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional +% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line +\def\@maketitle{\newpage +\bgroup\par\vskip\IEEEtitletopspace\vskip\IEEEtitletopspaceextra\centering% +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes, V1.8a abstract and index terms are not treated differently for compsoc technotes + {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\Large\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\large\sffamily}\@author + \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par}\relax +\else% not a technote + \vskip0.2em{\Huge\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\bfseries\LARGE\fi\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip + \bfseries\Large}\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\@title\par}\relax + \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\vskip1.0em\par% + % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% + {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax + \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca + % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode + {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par + {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill + \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax + \else% journal, peerreview or transmag + \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag + % transmag also handles author names just like conference mode + % it also uses \@IEEEtitleabstractindextex, but with one line less + % space above, and one more below + {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par + {\vspace{0.5\baselineskip}\relax\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\par}}\relax + \else% journal or peerreview + {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par + {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill + \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax + \fi + \fi + \fi +\fi\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup} + + +% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers +% V1.8a full width diamond line for single column use +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} +% V1.8a narrower width diamond line for double column use +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\relax} +% V1.8a bare core without rules to base a last resort on for very narrow linewidths +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii{\mbox{}\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\mbox{}\relax} + +% V1.8a allow \IEEEcompsocdiamondline to adjust for different linewidths. +% Use \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei if its width is less than 0.66\linewidth (0.487 nominal for single column) +% if not, fall back to \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii if its width is less than 0.75\linewidth (0.659 nominal for double column) +% if all else fails, try to make a custom diamondline based on the abnormally narrow linewidth +\def\IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei}\relax +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.66\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei\relax +\else +\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii}\relax +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.75\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii\relax +\else +\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii}\relax +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\linewidth\relax +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{-1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\relax +\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax +\fi\fi} + + +% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def +% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule +\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue} + + +\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape + \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}} +\let\@thanks\@empty + + +% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par. +\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}} + + +% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and +% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts. +\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}% +\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{1.2em}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% +\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax} + + +% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item +\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks +% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \IEEEquantizevspace +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule + {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax + \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item} +\else +% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}} +% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[] +\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}% +{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}} +% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument +\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break +\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces} +\fi + + +% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn +\twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}}] +\else +\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip +\fi +\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}} +\else +% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax} +\fi + +% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers. +\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}% +\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par +\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup} + + + +% V1.6 +% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text +% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column +% of two column text (technotes). +\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize +% adjust spacing to next text +% v1.6b handle peer review papers +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages +% regardless of the other paper modes + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip +\else + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% + \else% + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% + \else% journal uses more space + \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip% + \fi + \fi +\fi}} + + +% set the nominal and minimum values for the quantized title spacer +% the quantization algorithm will not allow the spacer size to +% become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be lengthened +% default to journal values +\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip} +\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip} +% conferences and technotes need tighter spacing +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip} + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip} +\fi +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip} + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip} +\fi + + +% V1.8a +\def\IEEEquantizevspace{\begingroup\@ifstar{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformtrue\@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformfalse\@IEEEquantizevspace}} +% \IEEEquantizevspace[output dimen register]{object}[object decl] +% {top baselineskip} +% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip] +% {unit height}{nominal vspace}{minimum vspace} +% +% Calculates and creates the vspace needed to make the combined height with +% the given object an integer multiple of the given unit height. This command +% is more general than the older \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace it replaces. +% +% The star form has no effect at present, but is reserved for future use. +% +% If the optional argument [output dimen register] is given, the calculated +% vspace height is stored in the given output dimen (or skip) register +% and no other action is taken, otherwise the object followed by a vspace* +% of the appropriate height is evaluated/output. +% +% The optional object decl (declarations) is code that is evaluated just +% before the object's height is evaluated. Its intented purpose is to allow +% for the alteration or disabling of code within the object during internal +% height evaluation (e.g., \long\def\thanks#1{\relax} ). +% This special code is not invoked if/when the object is rendered at the end. +% +% The nominal vspace is the target value of the added vspace and the minimum +% vspace is the lower allowed limit. The vspacer will be the value that achieves +% integral overall height, in terms of the given unit height, that is closest +% to the nominal vspace and that is not less than the specified minimum vspace. +% +% The line spacing algorithm of TeX is somewhat involved and requires special +% care with regard to the first line of a vertical list (which is indicated +% when \prevdepth is -1000pt or less). top baselineskip specifies the +% baselineskip or topskip used prior to the object. If the height of the +% first line of the object is greater than the given top baselineskip, then +% the top baselineskip is subtracted from the height of the first line and +% that difference is considered along with the rest of the object height +% (because the object will be shifted down by an amount = +% top line height - top baselineskip). Otherwise, the height of the first line +% of the object is ignored as far as the calculations are concerned. +% This algorithm is adequate for objects that appear at the top of a page +% (e.g., titles) where \topskip spacing is used. +% +% However, as explained on page 78 of the TeXbook, interline spacing is more +% complex when \baselineskip is being used (indicated by \prevdepth > +% -1000pt). The four optional parameters offset, prevdepth, lineskip limit and +% lineskip are assumed to be equal to be 0pt, \prevdepth, \lineskiplimit and +% \lineskip, respectively, if they are omitted. +% +% The prevdepth is the depth of the line before the object, the lineskip limit +% specifies how close the top of the object can come to the bottom of the +% previous line before \baselineskip is ignored and \lineskip is inserted +% between the object and the line above it. Lineskip does not come into +% play unless the first line of the object is high enough to "get too close" +% (as specified by lineskiplimit) to the line before it. The the prevdepth, +% lineskip limit, and lineskip optional parameters are not needed for the +% first object/line on a page (i.e., prevdepth <= -1000pt) where the simplier +% \topskip spacing rules are in effect. +% +% Offset is a manual adjustment that is added to the height calculations of +% object irrespective of the value of \prevdepth. It is useful when the top +% baselineskip will result in a noninteger unit height object placement even +% if the object itself has integral height. e.g., a footnotesize baselineskip +% is used before the object, thus an offset of, say -3pt, can be given as a +% correction. + +% Common combinations of these parameters include: +% +% top baselineskip: (and default values for offset, prevdepth, etc.) +% \topskip % for objects that appear at the top of a page +% \maxdimen % always ignore the height of the top line +% 0pt % always consider any positive height of the top line +% +% for objects to appear inline in normal text: +% top baselineskip = \baselineskip +% +% set prevdepth = -1000pt and top baselineskip = 0pt to consider the +% overall height of the object without any other external skip +% consideration + +\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspacestarform % flag to indicate star form +\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg % flag to indicate output dimen register is to be used +% Use our own private registers because the object could contain a +% structure that uses the existing tmp scratch pad registers +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightA +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightB +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightC +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth % need to save this early as can change +\newcount\@IEEEquantizemultiple +\newbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA + + +\def\@IEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregtrue\@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregfalse\@@IEEEquantizevspace[]}} + + +\long\def\@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax +% acquire and store +% #1 optional output dimen register +% #2 object +\edef\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg{#1}\relax +% allow for object specifications that contain parameters +\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#2}\relax +\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobject{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax +\@ifnextchar [{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[\relax]}} + +\long\def\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax +% acquire and store +% [#1] optional object decl, is \relax if not given by user +% #2 top baselineskip +% allow for object decl specifications that have parameters +\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#1}\relax +\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax +\edef\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip{#2}\ivIEEEquantizevspace} + +% acquire optional argument set and store +% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip] +\def\ivIEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@vIEEEquantizevspace}{\@vIEEEquantizevspace[0pt]}} +\def\@vIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizeoffset{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viIEEEquantizevspace[\prevdepth]}} +\def\@viIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth=#1\relax\@ifnextchar [{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskiplimit]}} +\def\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskip]}} +\def\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskip{#1}\@ixIEEEquantizevspace} + +% main routine +\def\@ixIEEEquantizevspace#1#2#3{\relax +\edef\@IEEEquantizeunitheight{#1}\relax +\edef\@IEEEquantizenomvspace{#2}\relax +\edef\@IEEEquantizeminvspace{#3}\relax +% \@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg +% \@IEEEquantizeobject +% \@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl +% \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip +% \@IEEEquantizeoffset +% \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth +% \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit +% \@IEEEquantizelineskip +% \@IEEEquantizeunitheight +% \@IEEEquantizenomvspace +% \@IEEEquantizeminvspace +% get overall height of object +\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vbox{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax +\@IEEEquantizeheightA\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax +% get height of first line of object +\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vtop{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax +\@IEEEquantizeheightB\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth>-1000pt\relax % prevdepth > -1000pf means full baselineskip\lineskip rules in effect +% lineskip spacing rule takes effect if height of top line > baselineskip - prevdepth - lineskiplimit, +% otherwise the baselineskip rule is in effect and the height of the first line does not matter at all. +\@IEEEquantizeheightC=\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit\relax % this works even though \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit is a macro because TeX allows --10pt notation +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax +% lineskip spacing rule is in effect i.e., the object is going to be shifted down relative to the +% baselineskip set position by its top line height (already a part of the total height) + prevdepth + lineskip - baselineskip +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizelineskip\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax +\else +% height of first line <= \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip - \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth - \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit +% standard baselineskip rules are in effect, so don't consider height of first line +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +\fi +% +\else % prevdepth <= -1000pt, simplier \topskip type rules in effect +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip +% height of top line (already included in the total height) in excess of +% baselineskip is the amount it will be downshifted +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax +\else +% height of first line is irrelevant, remove it +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +\fi +\fi % prevdepth <= -1000pt +% +% adjust height for any manual offset +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeoffset\relax +% add in nominal spacer +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax +% check for nonzero unitheight +\@IEEEquantizeheightB=\@IEEEquantizeunitheight\relax +\ifnum\@IEEEquantizeheightB=0\relax +\@IEEEclspkgerror{IEEEquantizevspace unit height cannot be zero. Assuming 10pt.}% +{Division by zero is not allowed.} +\@IEEEquantizeheightB=10pt\relax +\fi +% get integer number of lines +\@IEEEquantizemultiple=\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax +\divide\@IEEEquantizemultiple\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +% set A to contain the excess height over the \@IEEEquantizemultiple of lines +% A = height - multiple*unitheight +\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +\multiply\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizemultiple\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax +% set B to contain the height short of \@IEEEquantizemultiple+1 of lines +% B = unitheight - A +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightB-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax +% choose A or B based on which is closer +\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightA<\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +% C = nomvspace - A, go with lower +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax +\else +% C = nomvspace + B, go with upper +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +\fi +% if violate lower bound, use next integer bound +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightC<\@IEEEquantizeminvspace\relax +% A + B = unitheight +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax +\fi +% export object and spacer outside of group +\global\let\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax +\global\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax +\endgroup +\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg +\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg=\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax +\else +\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\relax +\vskip\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax +\fi} + + +% user command to disable all global assignments, possible use within object decl +\def\IEEEquantizedisableglobal{\let\global\relax +\let\gdef\def +\let\xdef\edef} +% user command to allow for the disabling of \thanks and other commands, possible use within object decl +\def\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds{\long\def\thanks##1{\relax}\relax +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}\def\newpage{\relax}} + + + + + +% V1.6 +% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area +% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed +% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer. +\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax +\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}} + + +% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords +% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for +% in the dynamic sizer. +\let\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext=\relax +\long\def\IEEEtitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext{#1}} + +% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext if +% not in compsoc or transmag journal mode - this way abstract and keywords +% can still be placed in their conventional position if not in those modes. +\def\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext{% +% display for all conference formats +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax +\else% non-conferences + % V1.8a display for all technotes + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax + % V1.8a add diamond line after abstract and index terms for compsoc technotes + \@IEEEcompsoconly{\noindent\hfill\IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}\relax + \else % non-conferences and non-technotes + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if not compsoc and not transmag + \else + \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag + \else% not compsoc journal nor transmag journal + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax + \fi + \fi + \fi +\fi} + + +% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current +% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing. +\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont +\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip% +\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax} + + +% abstract and keywords are in \small, except +% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize +% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small +% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt +\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small} +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine + \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize} +\fi + +% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}} +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}} + + +% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines +% so that spacing is more tightly controlled. +\def\abstract{\normalfont + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax + \else + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +% V1.6 The IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in +% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it) +\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi + \normalfont\normalsize} + +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax + \else + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi + \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% + \normalfont\normalsize} + +% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference +\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textit{\abstractname}---\relax + \else + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent + \textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax + \else + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} + \else% compsoc not conference +\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax + \else + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent + \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax + \else + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} + \fi +\fi + +% V1.8 transmag keywords index terms +% no abstract name, use indentation +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag +\def\abstract{\normalfont\parindent 1em\relax + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\indent + \else + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize + \textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} + +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\parindent 1em\relax + \if@twocolumn + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vspace{1\baselineskip}\bfseries\indent\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax + \else + \bgroup\par\vspace{1\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize + \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} +\fi + + + +% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that +% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token +% +% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input +% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not +% affect the formatting of the text +\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\% +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ % +\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +% a control space will come in as a macro +% when it is the last one on a line +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO% +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% +\fi% +% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one +% else spit it out and stop gobbling +\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else% +\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi% +\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}% + + + + +% TITLING OF SECTIONS +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are + % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space + % spacing from section number to title +% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ } +\fi\fi + + +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax} + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% compsoc journals need extra spacing +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} +\fi\fi + +%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control +%and use \@@par rather than \par +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \let\@svsec\@empty + \else + \refstepcounter{#1}% + % load section label and spacer into \@svsec + \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% + \fi% + \@tempskipa #5\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high + \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading + \noindent % subsections are NOT indented + % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title + % The IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal + {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}% + \endgroup + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}% + \else % printout low level headings + % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} + % got rid of sectionmark stuff + \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}% + \fi%skip down + \@xsect{#5}} + + +% section* handler +%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control +%and use \@@par rather than \par +\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup + % The IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal + \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup + % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} + \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi + \@xsect{#3}} + + +%% SECTION heading spacing and font +%% +% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name +% (for \@sect) #2 - section level +% #3 - section heading indent +% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text) +% If negative, make stretch parts negative too! +% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading, +% negative: amount to indent main text after heading +% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation +% #6 - font control +% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent +% trouble when you do something like: +% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... +% The IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section +% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good +% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber. +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% +% The IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% +\else % for journals +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% +\fi + +% for both journals and conferences +% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% + + +% compsoc +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +% compsoc conference +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% +{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}% +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% +{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}% +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}% +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% +\else% compsoc journals +% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\sublargesize\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% +% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society, +% I have to look up an example. +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}% +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}% +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}% +{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}% +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}% +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% +\fi\fi + +% transmag +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{0.75\parindent}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{1.25\parindent}{0.1ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% +{0.1ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% +\fi + + +% V1.8a provide for a raised line Introduction section for use with Computer +% Society papers. We have to remove any spacing glue after the section +% heading and then remove the blank line for the new paragraph after it. +% LaTeX's section handler alters \everypar and we need to propogate those +% changes outside of the \parbox lest there be spacing problems at the top +% of the next section. +\def\IEEEraisesectionheading#1{\noindent\raisebox{1.5\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{#1\unskip\global\everypar=\everypar}}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par} + + + +%% ENVIRONMENTS +% "box" symbols at end of proofs +\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box +% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one +\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}} +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc +\else +\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed +\fi + +%V1.8 flag to indicate if QED symbol is to be shown +\newif\if@IEEEQEDshow \@IEEEQEDshowtrue +\def\IEEEproofindentspace{2\parindent}% V1.8 allow user to change indentation amount if desired +% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support +% for an optional argument. +\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}} +\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\@IEEEQEDshowtrue\par\noindent\hspace{\IEEEproofindentspace}{\itshape #1: }} +\def\endIEEEproof{\if@IEEEQEDshow\hspace*{\fill}\nobreakspace\IEEEQED\fi\par} +% qedhere for equation environments, similar to AMS \qedhere +\def\IEEEQEDhereeqn{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse\eqno\let\eqno\relax\let\leqno\relax + \let\veqno\relax\hbox{\IEEEQED}} +% IEEE style qedhere for IEEEeqnarray and other environments +\def\IEEEQEDhere{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse\IEEEQED} +% command to disable QED at end of IEEEproof +\def\IEEEQEDoff{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse} + + +%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable +\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% V1.8a compsoc uses bold theorem titles, a period instead of a colon, vertical spacing, and hanging indentation +% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines. +% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this. +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax + \topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip + \rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent% + \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2.} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax} +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax +\topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip +\rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent% +% V1.6 The IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics +% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. + \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2\ (#3).} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax} +% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with +% lines below. +\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist\vskip 0.25\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} +\else +% +% noncompsoc +% +% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines. +% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this. +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist% + \item[]\textit{\indent #1\ #2:} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax} +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist% +% V1.6 The IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics +% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. + \item[]\textit{\indent #1\ #2\ (#3):} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax} +% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with +% lines below. +\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} +\fi + + + +% V1.6 +% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection +% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic. +% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number +% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator. +% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection +% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed. +% +% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override +\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}} +% string macro +\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section} + +% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection +% if section in_counter is used +\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% + \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname + {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]% + \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3} + \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% + \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep + \@thmcounter{#1}}% + \else + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% + \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep + \@thmcounter{#1}}% + \fi + \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% + \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} + + + +%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE +\pagestyle{headings} +\pagenumbering{arabic} + +% normally the page counter starts at 1 +\setcounter{page}{1} +% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1 +% (for duplex printing) +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview + \if@twoside + \setcounter{page}{-1} + \else + \setcounter{page}{0} + \fi +\fi + +% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as +% needed when single sided +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi +% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and +% enforce a rigid position for the last lines +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn +% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else + \twocolumn + \fi +\sloppy +\flushbottom +\fi + + + + +% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions + +% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package +% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau +% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command +% is present or not. +% For instance: +% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}} +% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if +% \appendices is invoked. +% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending +% on whether the user specifies a title: +% \section{My appendix title} +% or not: +% \section{} +% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title +% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of +% contents +\begingroup +\catcode`\Q=3 +\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} +\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} +\endgroup +% end of \@ifmtarg defs + + +% V1.7 +% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition +% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices +% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other +% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.) +\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section +\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax} + +% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument} +% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no +% argument (title) +% note we reroute the call to the old \section* +\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{% +\@ifmtarg{#1}{% +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesectiondis}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesection}}{% +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesectiondis\\* #1}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesection: #1}}} + +% we use this if the user calls \section{} after +% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the +% command and its argument. Then, warn the user. +\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless +\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}} + + +% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls +% and in the Table of Contents. +% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself + +% appendix command for one single appendix +% normally has no heading. However, if you want a +% heading, you can do so via the optional argument: +% \appendix[Optional Heading] +\def\appendix{\relax} +\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique + \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}% + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% + \setcounter{section}{0}% + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% + \gdef\thesection{A}% + \gdef\thesectiondis{}% + \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}% + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A} + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter + \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{% + \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\\* #1}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}% + % redefine \section command for appendix + % leave \section* as is + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% + \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument + % of the normal form +} + + + +% appendices command for multiple appendices +% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to +% declare the individual appendices +\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique + \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}% + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% + \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0 + \setcounter{subsection}{0}% + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% + \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices% + \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}% + \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}% + \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}% + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}} + \else% + \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}% + \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}% + \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}% + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}} + \fi% + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter + \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix + % redefine \section command for appendices + % leave \section* as is + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form + \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so, + \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument + % of the normal form +} + + + +% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + \def\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries} + \def\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape} + \def\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax} +\fi +% +% +% \IEEEPARstart +% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the +% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter +% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the +% first word which will be rendered in upper case. +% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to: +% +% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment +% within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart. +% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family +% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that +% interword glue will now work as normal. +% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. +% +% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. +% +% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users +% to change the font style. +% +% the number of lines that are indented to clear it +% may need to increase if using decenders +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES}{2} +% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to +% be overly cautious +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES}{2} +% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text +% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called). +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}{T} +% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline +% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum +% of this value and the height of the \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current +% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip +% so that it can respond to changes therein. +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}{1.1\baselineskip} +% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in, +% can take zero or one argument. +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE}{\bfseries} +% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify +% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument. +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE}{\MakeUppercase} +% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word, +% can take zero or one argument. +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE}{\relax} +% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify +% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument. +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE}{\MakeUppercase} +% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. +% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced +% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartSEP}{0.15em} +% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap. +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}{0em} +% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap. +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}{\/} + +% width of the letter output, set globally. Can be used in \IEEEPARstartSEP +% or \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET, but not the height lengths. +\newdimen\IEEEPARstartletwidth +\IEEEPARstartletwidth 0pt\relax + +% definition of \IEEEPARstart +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES +% +% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use +% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter +% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second +% argument is the rest of the first word(s). +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{% +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start +% on a new one +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% +% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE +% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued +\noindent +% calculate the desired height of the big letter +% it extends from the top of \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font +% down to \IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}% +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% +% extract the name of the current font in bold +% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME +\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% +{\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% +\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}% +% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired +% height of the drop letter +\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% +% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}% +% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the +% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% +\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% +\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% +\fi% +% and store it as a counter +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% +% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital +% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, +% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA +% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB +% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer +% division. Hence the use of the counters. +% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will +% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% +% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by +% floating point values +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the +% big letter. +\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% +% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the +% hanging indent +\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont +\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}% +% end of the isolated calculation environment +\global\IEEEPARstartletwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% +% add in the extra clearance we want +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartSEP\relax% +% add in the optional offset +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax% +% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the +% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use +% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command +% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other +% text won't be displaced by it. +\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% +\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% +\raisebox{-\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}% +\@IEEEPARstartfont\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}% +\hspace{\IEEEPARstartSEP}}}% +{\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}} + + + + +% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater +% than the specified space of argument one +% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) +% and issue a \newpage +% +% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} +% +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to +% be overly cautious +% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau +% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, +% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine +% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead +\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left +\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% +\newpage% +\fi\endgroup} + + + +% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT +% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size) +% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic! +% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a +% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo. +% MDS 7/2001 +% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries +\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue + +% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies +% and not just the previous section +\newcounter{IEEEbiography} +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0} + +% photo area size +\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area +\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area +% area cleared for photo +\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area +\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area + % actual depth will be a multiple of + % \baselineskip, rounded up +\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography + +\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize% +\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500% +% we need enough space to support the hanging indent +% the nominal value of the spacer +% and one extra line for good measure +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN% +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip% +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start +% with a new one +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}% +% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill +\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% +% the default box for where the photo goes +\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{% +\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}% +% +% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the +% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above +% and if so, override the default box with what they want +\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}% +\centering% +#1% +\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before +\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump +% to the biography, not the previous section +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% +\fi% +% one more biography +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}% +% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the +% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so +% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the +% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces. +\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command +\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate +% set the hanging indent +\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth% +\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% +% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}% +% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything +\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{% +\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}% +% now place the author name and begin the bio text +\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par% +% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area +% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry +% MDS +\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding + \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% + \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut +\fi% +\par\normalfont} + + + +% V1.6 +% added biography without a photo environment +\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{% +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before +\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump +% to the biography, not the previous section +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% +\fi% +% one more biography +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}% +\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500% +\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% +\parskip=0pt\par% +\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont} + + +% provide the user with some old font commands +% got this from article.cls +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} +\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} + + +% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS +% +% holds the special notice text +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax} + +% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do: +% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle +\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}% +\else% +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}% +\fi} + + + + +% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS +% to insert a publisher's ID footer +% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style +% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle +% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page +% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into +% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author +% names and the maintext. +% +% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the +% publisher's ID footer +% The IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, +% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip} +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote +% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no +% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the +% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the +% second column +% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on +% Information Theory") in which the IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for +% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip +% and call it even. +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip} +\fi + +% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt} +\fi + +% holds the ID text +\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax} + +% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called +\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid +\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse +% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom +% V1.6 use before \maketitle +\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue} + + +% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in +% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of +% the title page when using \IEEEpubid +% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or +% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid +% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the +% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this +% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility +% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been +% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page. +% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc +\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else +\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi} + +% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other +% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to +% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX. + + + +%% Lockout some commands under various conditions + +% general purpose bit bucket +\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin} + +% flags to prevent multiple warning messages +\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext +\@IEEEWARNthankstrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue +\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue + + +%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed +%% +% save commands which might be locked out +% so that the user can later restore them if needed +\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext + + +% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode +% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter +% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch +% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft +% paper. +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart + is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} +\fi +% and for technotes +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart + is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} +\fi + + +% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference +% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid, +% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. +% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead +% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen +% from filling up with redundant messages +\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse} +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} + + +% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently. +% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname +% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname ) +% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine +% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the +% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command +% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX +% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break. +% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal +% name can be left undisturbed. +\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse% +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} +% and make biography point to our bogus biography +\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography +\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography + +\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse% +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} + +\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse} +\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse} +\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse} +\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse} +\fi + + +% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out +\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{% +\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}% +\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks% +\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart% +\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography% +\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography% +\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto% +\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto% +\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid% +\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol% +\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership% +\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext} + + + +% need a backslash character for typeout output +{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12 +|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}} + + +% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings +\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno). +Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} + + +% provide some legacy IEEEtran commands +\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\IEEEtitleabstractindextext} +\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext} +% provide some legacy IEEEtran environments + + +% V1.8a no more support for these legacy commands +%\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} +%\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} +%\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} +%\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} +%\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} +%\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} +%\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} +% and environments +%\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} +%\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} +% V1.8 no more support for legacy IED list commands +%\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent +%\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} +%\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth} +%\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep} +%\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc} +%\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl} +%\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr} +% V1.8 no more support for QED and proof stuff +%\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED} +%\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed} +%\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen} +%\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}} +% V1.8 no longer support biography or biographynophoto +%\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography} +%\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto} +%\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography} +%\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto} +% V1.7 and later no longer supports \overrideIEEEmargins +%\def\overrideIEEEmargins{% +%\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}% +%\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}} + +\endinput + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% That's all folks! + diff --git a/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf b/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c8e41da Binary files /dev/null and b/IEEEtran/IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf differ diff --git a/IEEEtran/README b/IEEEtran/README new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a752bba --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/README @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + +August 26, 2015 + + +IEEEtran is a LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of Electrical and +Electronics Engineers (IEEE) transactions journals and conferences. +The latest version of the IEEEtran package can be found at CTAN: + +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran + +as well as within IEEE's site: + +http://www.ieee.org/ + +For latest news, helpful tips, answers to frequently asked questions, +beta releases and other support, visit the IEEEtran home page at my +website: + +http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ + +Version 1.8b has a number of significant changes over the v1.8a release. +For a full history of changes, please read the file changelog.txt. +The most notable changes in this release include: + + 1) Added new comsoc mode for the IEEE Communications Society. + This mode (at present) only invokes the use of the newtxmath math fonts. + + 2) Revised IEEEeqnarray column specifications to work with active " + (or other punctuation catcode changes) as with babel under the + german or ngerman language modes. + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem. + + 3) Added \indexspace and other index related macros as newer versions of + article.cls now do. These macros are needed to avoid an error when + using the glossaries package. + Thanks to Sebastian Nyberg for suggesting this change. + + 4) Fixed odd/even page header font bug under compsoc mode and + other page style code improvements. + Thanks to Marco Paolieri for reporting this problem. + + 5) Added hooks to allow for easy control of spacing above title. + + 6) Added the \IEEEnoauxwrite command. + Thanks to Sudarshan Mukherjee for suggesting this feature. + + +NOTE: Take care not to confuse the "comsoc" and "compsoc" class +options/modes as they are very different: + +comsoc ==> IEEE Communications Society +compsoc ==> IEEE Computer Society + +The comsoc mode requires that an acceptable Times math font be available on +the LaTeX system. This requirement will be enforced by IEEEtran in comsoc +mode. Either the freely available newtxmath font by Michael Sharpe +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/newtx +(version 1.451, July 28, 2015 or later is recommended) +or the commercial MathTime font (e.g., mtpro2.sty) is acceptable. +See Section II-D (2.4) "Class Options - comsoc, compsoc, transmag" of +the IEEEtran HOWTO for more details. + + +Best wishes for all your publication endeavors, + +Michael Shell +http://www.michaelshell.org/ + + +********************************** Files ********************************** + +README - This file. + +IEEEtran.cls - The IEEEtran LaTeX class file. + +changelog.txt - The revision history. + +IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf - The IEEEtran LaTeX class user manual. + +bare_conf.tex - A bare bones starter file for IEEE conference papers. + +bare_conf_compsoc.tex - A bare bones starter file for IEEE Computer Society + conference papers. + +bare_jrnl.tex - A bare bones starter file for IEEE journal papers. + +bare_jrnl_comsoc.tex - A bare bones starter file for IEEE Communications + Society journal papers. + +bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex - A bare bones starter file for IEEE Computer Society + journal papers. + +bare_jrnl_transmag.tex - A bare bones starter file for IEEE Transactions + on Magnetics journal papers. + +bare_adv.tex - A bare bones starter file showing advanced + techniques such as conditional compilation, + hyperlinks, PDF thumbnails, etc. The illustrated + format is for an IEEE Computer Society journal paper. + +*************************************************************************** +Legal Notice: +This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +User assumes all risk. +In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +of any information contained here. + +All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. + +This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +2003/12/01 or later. +Retain all contribution notices and credits. +** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** + +File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, + bare_conf.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, + bare_jrnl_comsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex, + bare_jrnl_transmag.tex +*************************************************************************** diff --git a/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex b/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1dcc284 --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/bare_adv.tex @@ -0,0 +1,943 @@ + +%% bare_adv.tex +%% V1.4b +%% 2015/08/26 +%% by Michael Shell +%% See: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the advanced use of IEEEtran.cls +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE Computer +%% Society journal paper. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ + +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%%************************************************************************* + + +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** +% The testflow support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ + + +% IEEEtran V1.7 and later provides for these CLASSINPUT macros to allow the +% user to reprogram some IEEEtran.cls defaults if needed. These settings +% override the internal defaults of IEEEtran.cls regardless of which class +% options are used. Do not use these unless you have good reason to do so as +% they can result in nonIEEE compliant documents. User beware. ;) +% +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch}{1.0} % baselinestretch +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{1in} % inner side margin +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}{1in} % outer side margin +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}{1in} % top text margin +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}{1in}% bottom text margin + + + + +% +\documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran} +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, +% manually specify the path to it like: +% \documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} + + +% For Computer Society journals, IEEEtran defaults to the use of +% Palatino/Palladio as is done in IEEE Computer Society journals. +% To go back to Times Roman, you can use this code: +%\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}\selectfont + + + + + +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) + + + +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{ifpdf} +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. +% usage: +% \ifpdf +% % pdf code +% \else +% % dvi code +% \fi +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. + + + + + + +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + % The IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option + % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003) + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} +\else + % normal IEEE + \usepackage{cite} +\fi +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. +% The latest version can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. +% +% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer +% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society papers do not use +% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers +% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order +% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite +% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0 +% and later. + + + + + +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSINFOpdf + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} +\else + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no + % driver is specified. + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} +\fi +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation +% can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex +% +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as +% well as large increases in file sizes. +% +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex + + + + + +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{amsmath} +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. +% +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath + + + + + +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** +%\usepackage{acronym} +% acronym.sty was written by Tobias Oetiker. This package provides tools for +% managing documents with large numbers of acronyms. (You don't *have* to +% use this package - unless you have a lot of acronyms, you may feel that +% such package management of them is bit of an overkill.) +% Do note that the acronym environment (which lists acronyms) will have a +% problem when used under IEEEtran.cls because acronym.sty relies on the +% description list environment - which IEEEtran.cls has customized for +% producing IEEE style lists. A workaround is to declared the longest +% label width via the IEEEtran.cls \IEEEiedlistdecl global control: +% +% \renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\IEEEsetlabelwidth{SONET}} +% \begin{acronym} +% +% \end{acronym} +% \renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\relax}% remember to reset \IEEEiedlistdecl +% +% instead of using the acronym environment's optional argument. +% The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/acronym + + +%\usepackage{algorithmic} +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx + + + + +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{array} +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array + + +%\usepackage{mdwmath} +%\usepackage{mdwtab} +% Also highly recommended is Mark Wooding's extremely powerful MDW tools, +% especially mdwmath.sty and mdwtab.sty which are used to format equations +% and tables, respectively. The MDWtools set is already installed on most +% LaTeX systems. The lastest version and documentation is available at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/mdwtools + + +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high +% quality. + + +%\usepackage{eqparbox} +% Also of notable interest is Scott Pakin's eqparbox package for creating +% (automatically sized) equal width boxes - aka "natural width parboxes". +% Available at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/eqparbox + + + + +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} +%\else +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} +%\fi +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls +% handling of captions. +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether +% compsoc mode has been enabled. +% +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig + + + + +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column +% figure. +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer +% needed. +% The latest version and documentation can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e + + +%\usepackage{stfloats} +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: +%\fnbelowfloat +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in +% such ways. +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: +% +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} +% The latest version can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix + + +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +% \usepackage[nomarkers]{endfloat} +% \let\MYoriglatexcaption\caption +% \renewcommand{\caption}[2][\relax]{\MYoriglatexcaption[#2]{#2}} +%\fi +% endfloat.sty was written by James Darrell McCauley, Jeff Goldberg and +% Axel Sommerfeldt. This package may be useful when used in conjunction with +% IEEEtran.cls' captionsoff option. Some IEEE journals/societies require that +% submissions have lists of figures/tables at the end of the paper and that +% figures/tables without any captions are placed on a page by themselves at +% the end of the document. If needed, the draftcls IEEEtran class option or +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch interface can be used to increase the line +% spacing as well. Be sure and use the nomarkers option of endfloat to +% prevent endfloat from "marking" where the figures would have been placed +% in the text. The two hack lines of code above are a slight modification of +% that suggested by in the endfloat docs (section 8.4.1) to ensure that +% the full captions always appear in the list of figures/tables - even if +% the user used the short optional argument of \caption[]{}. +% IEEE papers do not typically make use of \caption[]'s optional argument, +% so this should not be an issue. A similar trick can be used to disable +% captions of packages such as subfig.sty that lack options to turn off +% the subcaptions: +% For subfig.sty: +% \let\MYorigsubfloat\subfloat +% \renewcommand{\subfloat}[2][\relax]{\MYorigsubfloat[]{#2}} +% However, the above trick will not work if both optional arguments of +% the \subfloat command are used. Furthermore, there needs to be a +% description of each subfigure *somewhere* and endfloat does not add +% subfigure captions to its list of figures. Thus, the best approach is to +% avoid the use of subfigure captions (many IEEE journals avoid them anyway) +% and instead reference/explain all the subfigures within the main caption. +% The latest version of endfloat.sty and its documentation can obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/endfloat +% +% The IEEEtran \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff conditional can also be used +% later in the document, say, to conditionally put the References on a +% page by themselves. + + + + + +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{url} +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. + + +% NOTE: PDF thumbnail features are not required in IEEE papers +% and their use requires extra complexity and work. +%\ifCLASSINFOpdf +% \usepackage[pdftex]{thumbpdf} +%\else +% \usepackage[dvips]{thumbpdf} +%\fi +% thumbpdf.sty and its companion Perl utility were written by Heiko Oberdiek. +% It allows the user a way to produce PDF documents that contain fancy +% thumbnail images of each of the pages (which tools like acrobat reader can +% utilize). This is possible even when using dvi->ps->pdf workflow if the +% correct thumbpdf driver options are used. thumbpdf.sty incorporates the +% file containing the PDF thumbnail information (filename.tpm is used with +% dvips, filename.tpt is used with pdftex, where filename is the base name of +% your tex document) into the final ps or pdf output document. An external +% utility, the thumbpdf *Perl script* is needed to make these .tpm or .tpt +% thumbnail files from a .ps or .pdf version of the document (which obviously +% does not yet contain pdf thumbnails). Thus, one does a: +% +% thumbpdf filename.pdf +% +% to make a filename.tpt, and: +% +% thumbpdf --mode dvips filename.ps +% +% to make a filename.tpm which will then be loaded into the document by +% thumbpdf.sty the NEXT time the document is compiled (by pdflatex or +% latex->dvips->ps2pdf). Users must be careful to regenerate the .tpt and/or +% .tpm files if the main document changes and then to recompile the +% document to incorporate the revised thumbnails to ensure that thumbnails +% match the actual pages. It is easy to forget to do this! +% +% Unix systems come with a Perl interpreter. However, MS Windows users +% will usually have to install a Perl interpreter so that the thumbpdf +% script can be run. The Ghostscript PS/PDF interpreter is also required. +% See the thumbpdf docs for details. The latest version and documentation +% can be obtained at. +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/thumbpdf + + +% NOTE: PDF hyperlink and bookmark features are not required in IEEE +% papers and their use requires extra complexity and work. +% *** IF USING HYPERREF BE SURE AND CHANGE THE EXAMPLE PDF *** +% *** TITLE/SUBJECT/AUTHOR/KEYWORDS INFO BELOW!! *** +\newcommand\MYhyperrefoptions{bookmarks=true,bookmarksnumbered=true, +pdfpagemode={UseOutlines},plainpages=false,pdfpagelabels=true, +colorlinks=true,linkcolor={black},citecolor={black},urlcolor={black}, +pdftitle={Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Computer Society Journals},%.dvi->.ps->.pdf workflow if the respective packages/scripts are +% loaded/invoked with the correct driver options (dvips, etc.). +% As most IEEE papers use URLs sparingly (mainly in the references), this +% may not be as big an issue as with other publications. +% +% That said, Vilar Camara Neto created his breakurl.sty package which +% permits hyperref to easily break URLs even in dvi mode. +% Note that breakurl, unlike most other packages, must be loaded +% AFTER hyperref. The latest version of breakurl and its documentation can +% be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/breakurl +% breakurl.sty is not for use under pdflatex pdf mode. +% +% The advanced features offer by hyperref.sty are not required for IEEE +% submission, so users should weigh these features against the added +% complexity of use. +% The package options above demonstrate how to enable PDF bookmarks +% (a type of table of contents viewable in Acrobat Reader) as well as +% PDF document information (title, subject, author and keywords) that is +% viewable in Acrobat reader's Document_Properties menu. PDF document +% information is also used extensively to automate the cataloging of PDF +% documents. The above set of options ensures that hyperlinks will not be +% colored in the text and thus will not be visible in the printed page, +% but will be active on "mouse over". USING COLORS OR OTHER HIGHLIGHTING +% OF HYPERLINKS CAN RESULT IN DOCUMENT REJECTION BY THE IEEE, especially if +% these appear on the "printed" page. IF IN DOUBT, ASK THE RELEVANT +% SUBMISSION EDITOR. You may need to add the option hypertexnames=false if +% you used duplicate equation numbers, etc., but this should not be needed +% in normal IEEE work. +% The latest version of hyperref and its documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref + + + + + +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan +% to submit to, of course. ) + + +% correct bad hyphenation here +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} + + +\begin{document} +% +% paper title +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. +\title{Bare Advanced Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE Computer Society Journals} +% +% +% author names and IEEE memberships +% note positions of commas and nonbreaking spaces ( ~ ) LaTeX will not break +% a structure at a ~ so this keeps an author's name from being broken across +% two lines. +% use \thanks{} to gain access to the first footnote area +% a separate \thanks must be used for each paragraph as LaTeX2e's \thanks +% was not built to handle multiple paragraphs +% +% +%\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks is a special \thanks that produces the bulleted +% lists the Computer Society journals use for "first footnote" author +% affiliations. Use \IEEEcompsocthanksitem which works much like \item +% for each affiliation group. When not in compsoc mode, +% \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks becomes like \thanks and +% \IEEEcompsocthanksitem becomes a line break with idention. This +% facilitates dual compilation, although admittedly the differences in the +% desired content of \author between the different types of papers makes a +% one-size-fits-all approach a daunting prospect. For instance, compsoc +% journal papers have the author affiliations above the "Manuscript +% received ..." text while in non-compsoc journals this is reversed. Sigh. + +\author{Michael~Shell,~\IEEEmembership{Member,~IEEE,} + John~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Fellow,~OSA,} + and~Jane~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Life~Fellow,~IEEE}% <-this % stops a space +\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem M. Shell was with the Department +of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, +GA, 30332.\protect\\ +% note need leading \protect in front of \\ to get a newline within \thanks as +% \\ is fragile and will error, could use \hfil\break instead. +E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html +\IEEEcompsocthanksitem J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops a space +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised August 26, 2015.}} + +% note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - +% these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name +% and the end of the author line. i.e., if you had this: +% +% \author{....lastname \thanks{...} \thanks{...} } +% ^------------^------------^----Do not want these spaces! +% +% a space would be appended to the last name and could cause every name on that +% line to be shifted left slightly. This is one of those "LaTeX things". For +% instance, "\textbf{A} \textbf{B}" will typeset as "A B" not "AB". To get +% "AB" then you have to do: "\textbf{A}\textbf{B}" +% \thanks is no different in this regard, so shield the last } of each \thanks +% that ends a line with a % and do not let a space in before the next \thanks. +% Spaces after \IEEEmembership other than the last one are OK (and needed) as +% you are supposed to have spaces between the names. For what it is worth, +% this is a minor point as most people would not even notice if the said evil +% space somehow managed to creep in. + + + +% The paper headers +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~14, No.~8, August~2015}% +{Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Advanced Demo of IEEEtran.cls for IEEE Computer Society Journals} +% The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages +% after the title page when using the twoside option. +% +% *** Note that you probably will NOT want to include the author's *** +% *** name in the headers of peer review papers. *** +% You can use \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview for conditional compilation here if +% you desire. + + + +% The publisher's ID mark at the bottom of the page is less important with +% Computer Society journal papers as those publications place the marks +% outside of the main text columns and, therefore, unlike regular IEEE +% journals, the available text space is not reduced by their presence. +% If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like +% this: +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE} +% or like this to get the Computer Society new two part style. +%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE}% +%\hspace{\columnsep}\makebox[\columnwidth]{Published by the IEEE Computer Society\hfill}} +% Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second +% column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark (Computer Society journal +% papers don't need this extra clearance.) + + + +% use for special paper notices +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} + + + +% for Computer Society papers, we must declare the abstract and index terms +% PRIOR to the title within the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext IEEEtran +% command as these need to go into the title area created by \maketitle. +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations +% in the abstract or keywords. +\IEEEtitleabstractindextext{% +\begin{abstract} +The abstract goes here. +\end{abstract} + +% Note that keywords are not normally used for peerreview papers. +\begin{IEEEkeywords} +Computer Society, IEEE, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. +\end{IEEEkeywords}} + + +% make the title area +\maketitle + + +% To allow for easy dual compilation without having to reenter the +% abstract/keywords data, the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext text will +% not be used in maketitle, but will appear (i.e., to be "transported") +% here as \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext when compsoc mode +% is not selected if conference mode is selected - because compsoc +% conference papers position the abstract like regular (non-compsoc) +% papers do! +\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext +% \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext has no effect when using +% compsoc under a non-conference mode. + + +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover +% page as needed: +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} +% \fi +% +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle + + +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +\IEEEraisesectionheading{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}} +\else +\section{Introduction} +\label{sec:introduction} +\fi +% Computer Society journal (but not conference!) papers do something unusual +% with the very first section heading (almost always called "Introduction"). +% They place it ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls does not automatically do +% this for you, but you can achieve this effect with the provided +% \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command. Note the need to keep any \label that +% is to refer to the section immediately after \section in the above as +% \IEEEraisesectionheading puts \section within a raised box. + + + + +% The very first letter is a 2 line initial drop letter followed +% by the rest of the first word in caps (small caps for compsoc). +% +% form to use if the first word consists of a single letter: +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{demo} file is .... +% +% form to use if you need the single drop letter followed by +% normal text (unknown if ever used by the IEEE): +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{}demo file is .... +% +% Some journals put the first two words in caps: +% \IEEEPARstart{T}{his demo} file is .... +% +% Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter +% and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. +\IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' +for IEEE Computer Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later. +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter +% (should never be an issue) +I wish you the best of success. + +\hfill mds + +\hfill August 26, 2015 + +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} +Subsection text here. + +% needed in second column of first page if using \IEEEpubid +%\IEEEpubidadjcol + +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} +Subsubsection text here. + + +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. +% +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be +% displayed while in draft mode. +% +%\begin{figure}[!t] +%\centering +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure} + +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. +% However, the Computer Society has been known to put floats at the bottom. + + +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. +% +%\begin{figure*}[!t] +%\centering +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_first_case}} +%\hfil +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_second_case}} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure*} +% +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% The \label must come after \caption as always. +% +%\begin{table}[!t] +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells +%\caption{An Example of a Table} +%\label{table_example} +%\centering +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} +%\hline +%One & Two\\ +%\hline +%Three & Four\\ +%\hline +%\end{tabular} +%\end{table} + + +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + + + + +\section{Conclusion} +The conclusion goes here. + + + + + +% if have a single appendix: +%\appendix[Proof of the Zonklar Equations] +% or +%\appendix % for no appendix heading +% do not use \section anymore after \appendix, only \section* +% is possibly needed + +% use appendices with more than one appendix +% then use \section to start each appendix +% you must declare a \section before using any +% \subsection or using \label (\appendices by itself +% starts a section numbered zero.) +% + + +\appendices +\section{Proof of the First Zonklar Equation} +Appendix one text goes here. + +% you can choose not to have a title for an appendix +% if you want by leaving the argument blank +\section{} +Appendix two text goes here. + + +% use section* for acknowledgment +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form + \section*{Acknowledgments} +\else + % regular IEEE prefers the singular form + \section*{Acknowledgment} +\fi + + +The authors would like to thank... + + +% Can use something like this to put references on a page +% by themselves when using endfloat and the captionsoff option. +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff + \newpage +\fi + + + +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if +% the document is modified later +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} + +% references section + +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} +% +% manually copy in the resultant .bbl file +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to {\LaTeX}}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. + +\end{thebibliography} + +% biography section +% +% If you have an EPS/PDF photo (graphicx package needed) extra braces are +% needed around the contents of the optional argument to biography to prevent +% the LaTeX parser from getting confused when it sees the complicated +% \includegraphics command within an optional argument. (You could create +% your own custom macro containing the \includegraphics command to make things +% simpler here.) +%\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{mshell}}]{Michael Shell} +% or if you just want to reserve a space for a photo: + +\begin{IEEEbiography}{Michael Shell} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiography} + +% if you will not have a photo at all: +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{John Doe} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} + +% insert where needed to balance the two columns on the last page with +% biographies +%\newpage + +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{Jane Doe} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} + +% You can push biographies down or up by placing +% a \vfill before or after them. The appropriate +% use of \vfill depends on what kind of text is +% on the last page and whether or not the columns +% are being equalized. + +%\vfill + +% Can be used to pull up biographies so that the bottom of the last one +% is flush with the other column. +%\enlargethispage{-5in} + + + +% that's all folks +\end{document} + + diff --git a/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex b/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ccf18da --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/bare_conf.tex @@ -0,0 +1,576 @@ + +%% bare_conf.tex +%% V1.4b +%% 2015/08/26 +%% by Michael Shell +%% See: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE +%% conference paper. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ + +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%%************************************************************************* + + +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** +% The testflow support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ + + + +\documentclass[conference]{IEEEtran} +% Some Computer Society conferences also require the compsoc mode option, +% but others use the standard conference format. +% +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, +% manually specify the path to it like: +% \documentclass[conference]{../sty/IEEEtran} + + + + + +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) + + +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{ifpdf} +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. +% usage: +% \ifpdf +% % pdf code +% \else +% % dvi code +% \fi +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. + + + + + + +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{cite} +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. +% The latest version can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. + + + + + + +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSINFOpdf + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} +\else + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no + % driver is specified. + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} +\fi +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation +% can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex +% +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as +% well as large increases in file sizes. +% +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex + + + + + +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{amsmath} +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. +% +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath + + + + + +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{algorithmic} +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx + + + + +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{array} +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array + + +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high +% quality. + + + + +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=normalsize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} +%\else +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} +%\fi +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls +% handling of captions. +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a larger sans serif font +% than the serif footnote size font used in traditional IEEE formatting +% and thus the need to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending +% on whether compsoc mode has been enabled. +% +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig + + + + +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column +% figure. +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer +% needed. +% The latest version and documentation can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e + + +%\usepackage{stfloats} +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: +%\fnbelowfloat +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in +% such ways. +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: +% +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} +% The latest version can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix + + + + +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{url} +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. + + + + +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan +% to submit to, of course. ) + + +% correct bad hyphenation here +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} + + +\begin{document} +% +% paper title +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls\\ for IEEE Conferences} + + +% author names and affiliations +% use a multiple column layout for up to three different +% affiliations +\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell} +\IEEEauthorblockA{School of Electrical and\\Computer Engineering\\ +Georgia Institute of Technology\\ +Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\ +Email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{Homer Simpson} +\IEEEauthorblockA{Twentieth Century Fox\\ +Springfield, USA\\ +Email: homer@thesimpsons.com} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{James Kirk\\ and Montgomery Scott} +\IEEEauthorblockA{Starfleet Academy\\ +San Francisco, California 96678--2391\\ +Telephone: (800) 555--1212\\ +Fax: (888) 555--1212}} + +% conference papers do not typically use \thanks and this command +% is locked out in conference mode. If really needed, such as for +% the acknowledgment of grants, issue a \IEEEoverridecommandlockouts +% after \documentclass + +% for over three affiliations, or if they all won't fit within the width +% of the page, use this alternative format: +% +%\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}, +%Homer Simpson\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}, +%James Kirk\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}, +%Montgomery Scott\IEEEauthorrefmark{3} and +%Eldon Tyrell\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}School of Electrical and Computer Engineering\\ +%Georgia Institute of Technology, +%Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\ Email: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}Twentieth Century Fox, Springfield, USA\\ +%Email: homer@thesimpsons.com} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}Starfleet Academy, San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\ +%Telephone: (800) 555--1212, Fax: (888) 555--1212} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}Tyrell Inc., 123 Replicant Street, Los Angeles, California 90210--4321}} + + + + +% use for special paper notices +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} + + + + +% make the title area +\maketitle + +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations +% in the abstract +\begin{abstract} +The abstract goes here. +\end{abstract} + +% no keywords + + + + +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover +% page as needed: +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} +% \fi +% +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle + + + +\section{Introduction} +% no \IEEEPARstart +This demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' +for IEEE conference papers produced under \LaTeX\ using +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later. +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter +% (should never be an issue) +I wish you the best of success. + +\hfill mds + +\hfill August 26, 2015 + +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} +Subsection text here. + + +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} +Subsubsection text here. + + +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. +% +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be +% displayed while in draft mode. +% +%\begin{figure}[!t] +%\centering +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure} + +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. + + +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. +% +%\begin{figure*}[!t] +%\centering +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_first_case}} +%\hfil +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_second_case}} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure*} +% +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% The \label must come after \caption as always. +% +%\begin{table}[!t] +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells +%\caption{An Example of a Table} +%\label{table_example} +%\centering +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} +%\hline +%One & Two\\ +%\hline +%Three & Four\\ +%\hline +%\end{tabular} +%\end{table} + + +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + + + + +\section{Conclusion} +The conclusion goes here. + + + + +% conference papers do not normally have an appendix + + +% use section* for acknowledgment +\section*{Acknowledgment} + + +The authors would like to thank... + + + + + +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if +% the document is modified later +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} + +% references section + +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} +% +% manually copy in the resultant .bbl file +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. + +\end{thebibliography} + + + + +% that's all folks +\end{document} + + diff --git a/IEEEtran/bare_conf_compsoc.tex b/IEEEtran/bare_conf_compsoc.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5a05a6a --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/bare_conf_compsoc.tex @@ -0,0 +1,599 @@ + +%% bare_conf_compsoc.tex +%% V1.4b +%% 2015/08/26 +%% by Michael Shell +%% See: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE Computer +%% Society conference paper. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ + +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%%************************************************************************* + + +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** +% The testflow support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ + + + +\documentclass[conference,compsoc]{IEEEtran} +% Some/most Computer Society conferences require the compsoc mode option, +% but others may want the standard conference format. +% +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, +% manually specify the path to it like: +% \documentclass[conference,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} + + + + + +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) + + +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{ifpdf} +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. +% usage: +% \ifpdf +% % pdf code +% \else +% % dvi code +% \fi +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. + + + + + + +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option + % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003) + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} +\else + % normal IEEE + \usepackage{cite} +\fi +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. +% The latest version can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. +% +% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer +% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society papers do not use +% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers +% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order +% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite +% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0 +% and later. + + + + + +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSINFOpdf + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} +\else + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no + % driver is specified. + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} +\fi +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation +% can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex +% +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as +% well as large increases in file sizes. +% +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex + + + + + +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{amsmath} +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. +% +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath + + + + + +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{algorithmic} +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx + + + + +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{array} +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array + + +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high +% quality. + + + + +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} +%\else +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} +%\fi +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls +% handling of captions. +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether +% compsoc mode has been enabled. +% +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig + + + + +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column +% figure. +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer +% needed. +% The latest version and documentation can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e + + +%\usepackage{stfloats} +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: +%\fnbelowfloat +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in +% such ways. +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: +% +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} +% The latest version can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix + + + + +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{url} +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. + + + + +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan +% to submit to, of course. ) + + +% correct bad hyphenation here +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} + + +\begin{document} +% +% paper title +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE Computer Society Conferences} + + +% author names and affiliations +% use a multiple column layout for up to three different +% affiliations +\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell} +\IEEEauthorblockA{School of Electrical and\\Computer Engineering\\ +Georgia Institute of Technology\\ +Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\ +Email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{Homer Simpson} +\IEEEauthorblockA{Twentieth Century Fox\\ +Springfield, USA\\ +Email: homer@thesimpsons.com} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{James Kirk\\ and Montgomery Scott} +\IEEEauthorblockA{Starfleet Academy\\ +San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\ +Telephone: (800) 555--1212\\ +Fax: (888) 555--1212}} + +% conference papers do not typically use \thanks and this command +% is locked out in conference mode. If really needed, such as for +% the acknowledgment of grants, issue a \IEEEoverridecommandlockouts +% after \documentclass + +% for over three affiliations, or if they all won't fit within the width +% of the page (and note that there is less available width in this regard for +% compsoc conferences compared to traditional conferences), use this +% alternative format: +% +%\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}, +%Homer Simpson\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}, +%James Kirk\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}, +%Montgomery Scott\IEEEauthorrefmark{3} and +%Eldon Tyrell\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}School of Electrical and Computer Engineering\\ +%Georgia Institute of Technology, +%Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\ Email: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}Twentieth Century Fox, Springfield, USA\\ +%Email: homer@thesimpsons.com} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}Starfleet Academy, San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\ +%Telephone: (800) 555--1212, Fax: (888) 555--1212} +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}Tyrell Inc., 123 Replicant Street, Los Angeles, California 90210--4321}} + + + + +% use for special paper notices +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} + + + + +% make the title area +\maketitle + +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations +% in the abstract +\begin{abstract} +The abstract goes here. +\end{abstract} + +% no keywords + + + + +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover +% page as needed: +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} +% \fi +% +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle + + + +\section{Introduction} +% no \IEEEPARstart +This demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' +for IEEE Computer Society conference papers produced under \LaTeX\ using +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later. +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter +% (should never be an issue) +I wish you the best of success. + +\hfill mds + +\hfill August 26, 2015 + +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} +Subsection text here. + + +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} +Subsubsection text here. + + +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. +% +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be +% displayed while in draft mode. +% +%\begin{figure}[!t] +%\centering +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure} + +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. + + +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. +% +%\begin{figure*}[!t] +%\centering +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_first_case}} +%\hfil +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_second_case}} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure*} +% +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% The \label must come after \caption as always. +% +%\begin{table}[!t] +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells +%\caption{An Example of a Table} +%\label{table_example} +%\centering +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} +%\hline +%One & Two\\ +%\hline +%Three & Four\\ +%\hline +%\end{tabular} +%\end{table} + + +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + + + + +\section{Conclusion} +The conclusion goes here. + + + + +% conference papers do not normally have an appendix + + + +% use section* for acknowledgment +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form + \section*{Acknowledgments} +\else + % regular IEEE prefers the singular form + \section*{Acknowledgment} +\fi + + +The authors would like to thank... + + + + + +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if +% the document is modified later +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} + +% references section + +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} +% +% manually copy in the resultant .bbl file +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. + +\end{thebibliography} + + + + +% that's all folks +\end{document} + + diff --git a/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex b/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3270357 --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl.tex @@ -0,0 +1,717 @@ + +%% bare_jrnl.tex +%% V1.4b +%% 2015/08/26 +%% by Michael Shell +%% see http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE +%% journal paper. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ + +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%%************************************************************************* + + +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** +% The testflow support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ + + + +\documentclass[journal]{IEEEtran} +% +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, +% manually specify the path to it like: +% \documentclass[journal]{../sty/IEEEtran} + + + + + +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) + + +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{ifpdf} +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. +% usage: +% \ifpdf +% % pdf code +% \else +% % dvi code +% \fi +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. + + + + + + +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{cite} +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. +% The latest version can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. + + + + + + +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSINFOpdf + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} +\else + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no + % driver is specified. + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} +\fi +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation +% can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex +% +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as +% well as large increases in file sizes. +% +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex + + + + + +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{amsmath} +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. +% +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath + + + + + +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{algorithmic} +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx + + + + +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{array} +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array + + +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high +% quality. + + + + +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=normalsize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} +%\else +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} +%\fi +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls +% handling of captions. +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a larger sans serif font +% than the serif footnote size font used in traditional IEEE formatting +% and thus the need to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending +% on whether compsoc mode has been enabled. +% +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig + + + + +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column +% figure. +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer +% needed. +% The latest version and documentation can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e + + +%\usepackage{stfloats} +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: +%\fnbelowfloat +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in +% such ways. +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: +% +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} +% The latest version can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix + + + + +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +% \usepackage[nomarkers]{endfloat} +% \let\MYoriglatexcaption\caption +% \renewcommand{\caption}[2][\relax]{\MYoriglatexcaption[#2]{#2}} +%\fi +% endfloat.sty was written by James Darrell McCauley, Jeff Goldberg and +% Axel Sommerfeldt. This package may be useful when used in conjunction with +% IEEEtran.cls' captionsoff option. Some IEEE journals/societies require that +% submissions have lists of figures/tables at the end of the paper and that +% figures/tables without any captions are placed on a page by themselves at +% the end of the document. If needed, the draftcls IEEEtran class option or +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch interface can be used to increase the line +% spacing as well. Be sure and use the nomarkers option of endfloat to +% prevent endfloat from "marking" where the figures would have been placed +% in the text. The two hack lines of code above are a slight modification of +% that suggested by in the endfloat docs (section 8.4.1) to ensure that +% the full captions always appear in the list of figures/tables - even if +% the user used the short optional argument of \caption[]{}. +% IEEE papers do not typically make use of \caption[]'s optional argument, +% so this should not be an issue. A similar trick can be used to disable +% captions of packages such as subfig.sty that lack options to turn off +% the subcaptions: +% For subfig.sty: +% \let\MYorigsubfloat\subfloat +% \renewcommand{\subfloat}[2][\relax]{\MYorigsubfloat[]{#2}} +% However, the above trick will not work if both optional arguments of +% the \subfloat command are used. Furthermore, there needs to be a +% description of each subfigure *somewhere* and endfloat does not add +% subfigure captions to its list of figures. Thus, the best approach is to +% avoid the use of subfigure captions (many IEEE journals avoid them anyway) +% and instead reference/explain all the subfigures within the main caption. +% The latest version of endfloat.sty and its documentation can obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/endfloat +% +% The IEEEtran \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff conditional can also be used +% later in the document, say, to conditionally put the References on a +% page by themselves. + + + + +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{url} +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. + + + + +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan +% to submit to, of course. ) + + +% correct bad hyphenation here +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} + + +\begin{document} +% +% paper title +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls\\ for IEEE Journals} +% +% +% author names and IEEE memberships +% note positions of commas and nonbreaking spaces ( ~ ) LaTeX will not break +% a structure at a ~ so this keeps an author's name from being broken across +% two lines. +% use \thanks{} to gain access to the first footnote area +% a separate \thanks must be used for each paragraph as LaTeX2e's \thanks +% was not built to handle multiple paragraphs +% + +\author{Michael~Shell,~\IEEEmembership{Member,~IEEE,} + John~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Fellow,~OSA,} + and~Jane~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Life~Fellow,~IEEE}% <-this % stops a space +\thanks{M. Shell was with the Department +of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, +GA, 30332 USA e-mail: (see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}% <-this % stops a space +\thanks{J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops a space +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised August 26, 2015.}} + +% note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - +% these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name +% and the end of the author line. i.e., if you had this: +% +% \author{....lastname \thanks{...} \thanks{...} } +% ^------------^------------^----Do not want these spaces! +% +% a space would be appended to the last name and could cause every name on that +% line to be shifted left slightly. This is one of those "LaTeX things". For +% instance, "\textbf{A} \textbf{B}" will typeset as "A B" not "AB". To get +% "AB" then you have to do: "\textbf{A}\textbf{B}" +% \thanks is no different in this regard, so shield the last } of each \thanks +% that ends a line with a % and do not let a space in before the next \thanks. +% Spaces after \IEEEmembership other than the last one are OK (and needed) as +% you are supposed to have spaces between the names. For what it is worth, +% this is a minor point as most people would not even notice if the said evil +% space somehow managed to creep in. + + + +% The paper headers +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~14, No.~8, August~2015}% +{Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for IEEE Journals} +% The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages +% after the title page when using the twoside option. +% +% *** Note that you probably will NOT want to include the author's *** +% *** name in the headers of peer review papers. *** +% You can use \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview for conditional compilation here if +% you desire. + + + + +% If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like +% this: +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE} +% Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second +% column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark. + + + +% use for special paper notices +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} + + + + +% make the title area +\maketitle + +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations +% in the abstract or keywords. +\begin{abstract} +The abstract goes here. +\end{abstract} + +% Note that keywords are not normally used for peerreview papers. +\begin{IEEEkeywords} +IEEE, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. +\end{IEEEkeywords} + + + + + + +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover +% page as needed: +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} +% \fi +% +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle + + + +\section{Introduction} +% The very first letter is a 2 line initial drop letter followed +% by the rest of the first word in caps. +% +% form to use if the first word consists of a single letter: +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{demo} file is .... +% +% form to use if you need the single drop letter followed by +% normal text (unknown if ever used by the IEEE): +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{}demo file is .... +% +% Some journals put the first two words in caps: +% \IEEEPARstart{T}{his demo} file is .... +% +% Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter +% and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. +\IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' +for IEEE journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later. +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter +% (should never be an issue) +I wish you the best of success. + +\hfill mds + +\hfill August 26, 2015 + +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} +Subsection text here. + +% needed in second column of first page if using \IEEEpubid +%\IEEEpubidadjcol + +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} +Subsubsection text here. + + +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. +% +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be +% displayed while in draft mode. +% +%\begin{figure}[!t] +%\centering +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure} + +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. + + +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. +% +%\begin{figure*}[!t] +%\centering +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_first_case}} +%\hfil +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_second_case}} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure*} +% +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% The \label must come after \caption as always. +% +%\begin{table}[!t] +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells +%\caption{An Example of a Table} +%\label{table_example} +%\centering +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} +%\hline +%One & Two\\ +%\hline +%Three & Four\\ +%\hline +%\end{tabular} +%\end{table} + + +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + + + + +\section{Conclusion} +The conclusion goes here. + + + + + +% if have a single appendix: +%\appendix[Proof of the Zonklar Equations] +% or +%\appendix % for no appendix heading +% do not use \section anymore after \appendix, only \section* +% is possibly needed + +% use appendices with more than one appendix +% then use \section to start each appendix +% you must declare a \section before using any +% \subsection or using \label (\appendices by itself +% starts a section numbered zero.) +% + + +\appendices +\section{Proof of the First Zonklar Equation} +Appendix one text goes here. + +% you can choose not to have a title for an appendix +% if you want by leaving the argument blank +\section{} +Appendix two text goes here. + + +% use section* for acknowledgment +\section*{Acknowledgment} + + +The authors would like to thank... + + +% Can use something like this to put references on a page +% by themselves when using endfloat and the captionsoff option. +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff + \newpage +\fi + + + +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if +% the document is modified later +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} + +% references section + +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} +% +% manually copy in the resultant .bbl file +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. + +\end{thebibliography} + +% biography section +% +% If you have an EPS/PDF photo (graphicx package needed) extra braces are +% needed around the contents of the optional argument to biography to prevent +% the LaTeX parser from getting confused when it sees the complicated +% \includegraphics command within an optional argument. (You could create +% your own custom macro containing the \includegraphics command to make things +% simpler here.) +%\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{mshell}}]{Michael Shell} +% or if you just want to reserve a space for a photo: + +\begin{IEEEbiography}{Michael Shell} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiography} + +% if you will not have a photo at all: +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{John Doe} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} + +% insert where needed to balance the two columns on the last page with +% biographies +%\newpage + +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{Jane Doe} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} + +% You can push biographies down or up by placing +% a \vfill before or after them. The appropriate +% use of \vfill depends on what kind of text is +% on the last page and whether or not the columns +% are being equalized. + +%\vfill + +% Can be used to pull up biographies so that the bottom of the last one +% is flush with the other column. +%\enlargethispage{-5in} + + + +% that's all folks +\end{document} + + diff --git a/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex b/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff80b3f --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex @@ -0,0 +1,787 @@ + +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex +%% V1.4b +%% 2015/08/26 +%% by Michael Shell +%% See: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE +%% Computer Society journal paper. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ + +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%%************************************************************************* + + +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** +% The testflow support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ + + +\documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran} +% +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, +% manually specify the path to it like: +% \documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} + + + + + +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) + + +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{ifpdf} +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. +% usage: +% \ifpdf +% % pdf code +% \else +% % dvi code +% \fi +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. + + + + + + +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option + % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003) + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite} +\else + % normal IEEE + \usepackage{cite} +\fi +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. +% The latest version can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. +% +% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer +% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society papers do not use +% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers +% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order +% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite +% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0 +% and later. Note also the use of a CLASSOPTION conditional provided by +% IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later. + + + + + +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSINFOpdf + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} +\else + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no + % driver is specified. + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} +\fi +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation +% can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex +% +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as +% well as large increases in file sizes. +% +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex + + + + + + +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{amsmath} +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. +% +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath + + + + + +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{algorithmic} +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx + + + + +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{array} +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array + + +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high +% quality. + + + + +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} +%\else +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} +%\fi +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls +% handling of captions. +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether +% compsoc mode has been enabled. +% +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig + + + + +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column +% figure. +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer +% needed. +% The latest version and documentation can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e + + +%\usepackage{stfloats} +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: +%\fnbelowfloat +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in +% such ways. +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: +% +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} +% The latest version can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix + + + + +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +% \usepackage[nomarkers]{endfloat} +% \let\MYoriglatexcaption\caption +% \renewcommand{\caption}[2][\relax]{\MYoriglatexcaption[#2]{#2}} +%\fi +% endfloat.sty was written by James Darrell McCauley, Jeff Goldberg and +% Axel Sommerfeldt. This package may be useful when used in conjunction with +% IEEEtran.cls' captionsoff option. Some IEEE journals/societies require that +% submissions have lists of figures/tables at the end of the paper and that +% figures/tables without any captions are placed on a page by themselves at +% the end of the document. If needed, the draftcls IEEEtran class option or +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch interface can be used to increase the line +% spacing as well. Be sure and use the nomarkers option of endfloat to +% prevent endfloat from "marking" where the figures would have been placed +% in the text. The two hack lines of code above are a slight modification of +% that suggested by in the endfloat docs (section 8.4.1) to ensure that +% the full captions always appear in the list of figures/tables - even if +% the user used the short optional argument of \caption[]{}. +% IEEE papers do not typically make use of \caption[]'s optional argument, +% so this should not be an issue. A similar trick can be used to disable +% captions of packages such as subfig.sty that lack options to turn off +% the subcaptions: +% For subfig.sty: +% \let\MYorigsubfloat\subfloat +% \renewcommand{\subfloat}[2][\relax]{\MYorigsubfloat[]{#2}} +% However, the above trick will not work if both optional arguments of +% the \subfloat command are used. Furthermore, there needs to be a +% description of each subfigure *somewhere* and endfloat does not add +% subfigure captions to its list of figures. Thus, the best approach is to +% avoid the use of subfigure captions (many IEEE journals avoid them anyway) +% and instead reference/explain all the subfigures within the main caption. +% The latest version of endfloat.sty and its documentation can obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/endfloat +% +% The IEEEtran \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff conditional can also be used +% later in the document, say, to conditionally put the References on a +% page by themselves. + + + + +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{url} +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. + + + + + +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan +% to submit to, of course. ) + + +% correct bad hyphenation here +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} + + +\begin{document} +% +% paper title +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE Computer Society Journals} +% +% +% author names and IEEE memberships +% note positions of commas and nonbreaking spaces ( ~ ) LaTeX will not break +% a structure at a ~ so this keeps an author's name from being broken across +% two lines. +% use \thanks{} to gain access to the first footnote area +% a separate \thanks must be used for each paragraph as LaTeX2e's \thanks +% was not built to handle multiple paragraphs +% +% +%\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks is a special \thanks that produces the bulleted +% lists the Computer Society journals use for "first footnote" author +% affiliations. Use \IEEEcompsocthanksitem which works much like \item +% for each affiliation group. When not in compsoc mode, +% \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks becomes like \thanks and +% \IEEEcompsocthanksitem becomes a line break with idention. This +% facilitates dual compilation, although admittedly the differences in the +% desired content of \author between the different types of papers makes a +% one-size-fits-all approach a daunting prospect. For instance, compsoc +% journal papers have the author affiliations above the "Manuscript +% received ..." text while in non-compsoc journals this is reversed. Sigh. + +\author{Michael~Shell,~\IEEEmembership{Member,~IEEE,} + John~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Fellow,~OSA,} + and~Jane~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Life~Fellow,~IEEE}% <-this % stops a space +\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem M. Shell was with the Department +of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, +GA, 30332.\protect\\ +% note need leading \protect in front of \\ to get a newline within \thanks as +% \\ is fragile and will error, could use \hfil\break instead. +E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html +\IEEEcompsocthanksitem J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops an unwanted space +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised August 26, 2015.}} + +% note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - +% these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name +% and the end of the author line. i.e., if you had this: +% +% \author{....lastname \thanks{...} \thanks{...} } +% ^------------^------------^----Do not want these spaces! +% +% a space would be appended to the last name and could cause every name on that +% line to be shifted left slightly. This is one of those "LaTeX things". For +% instance, "\textbf{A} \textbf{B}" will typeset as "A B" not "AB". To get +% "AB" then you have to do: "\textbf{A}\textbf{B}" +% \thanks is no different in this regard, so shield the last } of each \thanks +% that ends a line with a % and do not let a space in before the next \thanks. +% Spaces after \IEEEmembership other than the last one are OK (and needed) as +% you are supposed to have spaces between the names. For what it is worth, +% this is a minor point as most people would not even notice if the said evil +% space somehow managed to creep in. + + + +% The paper headers +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~14, No.~8, August~2015}% +{Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Computer Society Journals} +% The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages +% after the title page when using the twoside option. +% +% *** Note that you probably will NOT want to include the author's *** +% *** name in the headers of peer review papers. *** +% You can use \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview for conditional compilation here if +% you desire. + + + +% The publisher's ID mark at the bottom of the page is less important with +% Computer Society journal papers as those publications place the marks +% outside of the main text columns and, therefore, unlike regular IEEE +% journals, the available text space is not reduced by their presence. +% If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like +% this: +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE} +% or like this to get the Computer Society new two part style. +%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE}% +%\hspace{\columnsep}\makebox[\columnwidth]{Published by the IEEE Computer Society\hfill}} +% Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second +% column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark (Computer Society jorunal +% papers don't need this extra clearance.) + + + +% use for special paper notices +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} + + + +% for Computer Society papers, we must declare the abstract and index terms +% PRIOR to the title within the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext IEEEtran +% command as these need to go into the title area created by \maketitle. +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations +% in the abstract or keywords. +\IEEEtitleabstractindextext{% +\begin{abstract} +The abstract goes here. +\end{abstract} + +% Note that keywords are not normally used for peerreview papers. +\begin{IEEEkeywords} +Computer Society, IEEE, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. +\end{IEEEkeywords}} + + +% make the title area +\maketitle + + +% To allow for easy dual compilation without having to reenter the +% abstract/keywords data, the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext text will +% not be used in maketitle, but will appear (i.e., to be "transported") +% here as \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext when the compsoc +% or transmag modes are not selected if conference mode is selected +% - because all conference papers position the abstract like regular +% papers do. +\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext +% \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext has no effect when using +% compsoc or transmag under a non-conference mode. + + + +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover +% page as needed: +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} +% \fi +% +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle + + + +\IEEEraisesectionheading{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}} +% Computer Society journal (but not conference!) papers do something unusual +% with the very first section heading (almost always called "Introduction"). +% They place it ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls does not automatically do +% this for you, but you can achieve this effect with the provided +% \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command. Note the need to keep any \label that +% is to refer to the section immediately after \section in the above as +% \IEEEraisesectionheading puts \section within a raised box. + + + + +% The very first letter is a 2 line initial drop letter followed +% by the rest of the first word in caps (small caps for compsoc). +% +% form to use if the first word consists of a single letter: +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{demo} file is .... +% +% form to use if you need the single drop letter followed by +% normal text (unknown if ever used by the IEEE): +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{}demo file is .... +% +% Some journals put the first two words in caps: +% \IEEEPARstart{T}{his demo} file is .... +% +% Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter +% and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. +\IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' +for IEEE Computer Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later. +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter +% (should never be an issue) +I wish you the best of success. + +\hfill mds + +\hfill August 26, 2015 + +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} +Subsection text here. + +% needed in second column of first page if using \IEEEpubid +%\IEEEpubidadjcol + +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} +Subsubsection text here. + + +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. +% +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be +% displayed while in draft mode. +% +%\begin{figure}[!t] +%\centering +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure} + +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. +% However, the Computer Society has been known to put floats at the bottom. + + +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. +% +%\begin{figure*}[!t] +%\centering +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_first_case}} +%\hfil +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_second_case}} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure*} +% +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% The \label must come after \caption as always. +% +%\begin{table}[!t] +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells +%\caption{An Example of a Table} +%\label{table_example} +%\centering +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} +%\hline +%One & Two\\ +%\hline +%Three & Four\\ +%\hline +%\end{tabular} +%\end{table} + + +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + + + + +\section{Conclusion} +The conclusion goes here. + + + + + +% if have a single appendix: +%\appendix[Proof of the Zonklar Equations] +% or +%\appendix % for no appendix heading +% do not use \section anymore after \appendix, only \section* +% is possibly needed + +% use appendices with more than one appendix +% then use \section to start each appendix +% you must declare a \section before using any +% \subsection or using \label (\appendices by itself +% starts a section numbered zero.) +% + + +\appendices +\section{Proof of the First Zonklar Equation} +Appendix one text goes here. + +% you can choose not to have a title for an appendix +% if you want by leaving the argument blank +\section{} +Appendix two text goes here. + + +% use section* for acknowledgment +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc + % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form + \section*{Acknowledgments} +\else + % regular IEEE prefers the singular form + \section*{Acknowledgment} +\fi + + +The authors would like to thank... + + +% Can use something like this to put references on a page +% by themselves when using endfloat and the captionsoff option. +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff + \newpage +\fi + + + +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if +% the document is modified later +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} + +% references section + +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} +% +% manually copy in the resultant .bbl file +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. + +\end{thebibliography} + +% biography section +% +% If you have an EPS/PDF photo (graphicx package needed) extra braces are +% needed around the contents of the optional argument to biography to prevent +% the LaTeX parser from getting confused when it sees the complicated +% \includegraphics command within an optional argument. (You could create +% your own custom macro containing the \includegraphics command to make things +% simpler here.) +%\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{mshell}}]{Michael Shell} +% or if you just want to reserve a space for a photo: + +\begin{IEEEbiography}{Michael Shell} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiography} + +% if you will not have a photo at all: +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{John Doe} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} + +% insert where needed to balance the two columns on the last page with +% biographies +%\newpage + +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{Jane Doe} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} + +% You can push biographies down or up by placing +% a \vfill before or after them. The appropriate +% use of \vfill depends on what kind of text is +% on the last page and whether or not the columns +% are being equalized. + +%\vfill + +% Can be used to pull up biographies so that the bottom of the last one +% is flush with the other column. +%\enlargethispage{-5in} + + + +% that's all folks +\end{document} + + diff --git a/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_comsoc.tex b/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_comsoc.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..39d6b85 --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_comsoc.tex @@ -0,0 +1,744 @@ + +%% bare_jrnl_comsoc.tex +%% V1.4b +%% 2015/08/26 +%% by Michael Shell +%% see http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE +%% Communications Society journal paper. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ + +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%%************************************************************************* + + +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** +% The testflow support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ + + + +\documentclass[journal,comsoc]{IEEEtran} +% +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, +% manually specify the path to it like: +% \documentclass[journal,comsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran} + + +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}% optional T1 font encoding + + +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) + + +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{ifpdf} +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. +% usage: +% \ifpdf +% % pdf code +% \else +% % dvi code +% \fi +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. + + + + + + +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{cite} +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. +% The latest version can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. + + + + + + +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSINFOpdf + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} +\else + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no + % driver is specified. + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} +\fi +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation +% can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex +% +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as +% well as large increases in file sizes. +% +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex + + + + + +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** +% +\usepackage{amsmath} +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. +% Do NOT use the amsbsy package under comsoc mode as that feature is +% already built into the Times Math font (newtxmath, mathtime, etc.). +% +% Also, note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: +\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath + + +% Select a Times math font under comsoc mode or else one will automatically +% be selected for you at the document start. This is required as Communications +% Society journals use a Times, not Computer Modern, math font. +\usepackage[cmintegrals]{newtxmath} +% The freely available newtxmath package was written by Michael Sharpe and +% provides a feature rich Times math font. The cmintegrals option, which is +% the default under IEEEtran, is needed to get the correct style integral +% symbols used in Communications Society journals. Version 1.451, July 28, +% 2015 or later is recommended. Also, do *not* load the newtxtext.sty package +% as doing so would alter the main text font. +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/newtx +% +% Alternatively, you can use the MathTime commercial fonts if you have them +% installed on your system: +%\usepackage{mtpro2} +%\usepackage{mt11p} +%\usepackage{mathtime} + + +%\usepackage{bm} +% The bm.sty package was written by David Carlisle and Frank Mittelbach. +% This package provides a \bm{} to produce bold math symbols. +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/bm + + + + + +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{algorithmic} +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx + + + + +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{array} +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array + + +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high +% quality. + + + + +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=normalsize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} +%\else +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} +%\fi +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls +% handling of captions. +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a larger sans serif font +% than the serif footnote size font used in traditional IEEE formatting +% and thus the need to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending +% on whether compsoc mode has been enabled. +% +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig + + + + +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column +% figure. +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer +% needed. +% The latest version and documentation can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e + + +%\usepackage{stfloats} +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: +%\fnbelowfloat +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in +% such ways. +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: +% +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} +% The latest version can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix + + + + +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +% \usepackage[nomarkers]{endfloat} +% \let\MYoriglatexcaption\caption +% \renewcommand{\caption}[2][\relax]{\MYoriglatexcaption[#2]{#2}} +%\fi +% endfloat.sty was written by James Darrell McCauley, Jeff Goldberg and +% Axel Sommerfeldt. This package may be useful when used in conjunction with +% IEEEtran.cls' captionsoff option. Some IEEE journals/societies require that +% submissions have lists of figures/tables at the end of the paper and that +% figures/tables without any captions are placed on a page by themselves at +% the end of the document. If needed, the draftcls IEEEtran class option or +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch interface can be used to increase the line +% spacing as well. Be sure and use the nomarkers option of endfloat to +% prevent endfloat from "marking" where the figures would have been placed +% in the text. The two hack lines of code above are a slight modification of +% that suggested by in the endfloat docs (section 8.4.1) to ensure that +% the full captions always appear in the list of figures/tables - even if +% the user used the short optional argument of \caption[]{}. +% IEEE papers do not typically make use of \caption[]'s optional argument, +% so this should not be an issue. A similar trick can be used to disable +% captions of packages such as subfig.sty that lack options to turn off +% the subcaptions: +% For subfig.sty: +% \let\MYorigsubfloat\subfloat +% \renewcommand{\subfloat}[2][\relax]{\MYorigsubfloat[]{#2}} +% However, the above trick will not work if both optional arguments of +% the \subfloat command are used. Furthermore, there needs to be a +% description of each subfigure *somewhere* and endfloat does not add +% subfigure captions to its list of figures. Thus, the best approach is to +% avoid the use of subfigure captions (many IEEE journals avoid them anyway) +% and instead reference/explain all the subfigures within the main caption. +% The latest version of endfloat.sty and its documentation can obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/endfloat +% +% The IEEEtran \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff conditional can also be used +% later in the document, say, to conditionally put the References on a +% page by themselves. + + + + +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{url} +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. + + + + +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan +% to submit to, of course. ) + + +% correct bad hyphenation here +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} + + +\begin{document} +% +% paper title +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE Communications Society Journals} +% +% +% author names and IEEE memberships +% note positions of commas and nonbreaking spaces ( ~ ) LaTeX will not break +% a structure at a ~ so this keeps an author's name from being broken across +% two lines. +% use \thanks{} to gain access to the first footnote area +% a separate \thanks must be used for each paragraph as LaTeX2e's \thanks +% was not built to handle multiple paragraphs +% + +\author{Michael~Shell,~\IEEEmembership{Member,~IEEE,} + John~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Fellow,~OSA,} + and~Jane~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Life~Fellow,~IEEE}% <-this % stops a space +\thanks{M. Shell was with the Department +of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, +GA, 30332 USA e-mail: (see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}% <-this % stops a space +\thanks{J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops a space +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised August 26, 2015.}} + +% note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks - +% these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name +% and the end of the author line. i.e., if you had this: +% +% \author{....lastname \thanks{...} \thanks{...} } +% ^------------^------------^----Do not want these spaces! +% +% a space would be appended to the last name and could cause every name on that +% line to be shifted left slightly. This is one of those "LaTeX things". For +% instance, "\textbf{A} \textbf{B}" will typeset as "A B" not "AB". To get +% "AB" then you have to do: "\textbf{A}\textbf{B}" +% \thanks is no different in this regard, so shield the last } of each \thanks +% that ends a line with a % and do not let a space in before the next \thanks. +% Spaces after \IEEEmembership other than the last one are OK (and needed) as +% you are supposed to have spaces between the names. For what it is worth, +% this is a minor point as most people would not even notice if the said evil +% space somehow managed to creep in. + + + +% The paper headers +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~14, No.~8, August~2015}% +{Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for IEEE Communications Society Journals} +% The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages +% after the title page when using the twoside option. +% +% *** Note that you probably will NOT want to include the author's *** +% *** name in the headers of peer review papers. *** +% You can use \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview for conditional compilation here if +% you desire. + + + + +% If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like +% this: +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE} +% Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second +% column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark. + + + +% use for special paper notices +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} + + + + +% make the title area +\maketitle + +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations +% in the abstract or keywords. +\begin{abstract} +The abstract goes here. +\end{abstract} + +% Note that keywords are not normally used for peerreview papers. +\begin{IEEEkeywords} +Communications Society, IEEE, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template. +\end{IEEEkeywords} + + + + + + +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover +% page as needed: +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} +% \fi +% +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle + + + +\section{Introduction} +% The very first letter is a 2 line initial drop letter followed +% by the rest of the first word in caps. +% +% form to use if the first word consists of a single letter: +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{demo} file is .... +% +% form to use if you need the single drop letter followed by +% normal text (unknown if ever used by the IEEE): +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{}demo file is .... +% +% Some journals put the first two words in caps: +% \IEEEPARstart{T}{his demo} file is .... +% +% Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter +% and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. +\IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' +for IEEE Communications Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later. +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter +% (should never be an issue) +I wish you the best of success. + +\hfill mds + +\hfill August 26, 2015 + +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} +Subsection text here. + +% needed in second column of first page if using \IEEEpubid +%\IEEEpubidadjcol + +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} +Subsubsection text here. + + +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. +% +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be +% displayed while in draft mode. +% +%\begin{figure}[!t] +%\centering +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure} + +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. + + +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. +% +%\begin{figure*}[!t] +%\centering +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_first_case}} +%\hfil +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_second_case}} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure*} +% +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% The \label must come after \caption as always. +% +%\begin{table}[!t] +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells +%\caption{An Example of a Table} +%\label{table_example} +%\centering +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} +%\hline +%One & Two\\ +%\hline +%Three & Four\\ +%\hline +%\end{tabular} +%\end{table} + + +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + + + + +\section{Conclusion} +The conclusion goes here. + + + + + +% if have a single appendix: +%\appendix[Proof of the Zonklar Equations] +% or +%\appendix % for no appendix heading +% do not use \section anymore after \appendix, only \section* +% is possibly needed + +% use appendices with more than one appendix +% then use \section to start each appendix +% you must declare a \section before using any +% \subsection or using \label (\appendices by itself +% starts a section numbered zero.) +% + + +\appendices +\section{Proof of the First Zonklar Equation} +Appendix one text goes here. + +% you can choose not to have a title for an appendix +% if you want by leaving the argument blank +\section{} +Appendix two text goes here. + + +% use section* for acknowledgment +\section*{Acknowledgment} + + +The authors would like to thank... + + +% Can use something like this to put references on a page +% by themselves when using endfloat and the captionsoff option. +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff + \newpage +\fi + + + +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if +% the document is modified later +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} + +% references section + +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} +% +% manually copy in the resultant .bbl file +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. + +\end{thebibliography} + +% biography section +% +% If you have an EPS/PDF photo (graphicx package needed) extra braces are +% needed around the contents of the optional argument to biography to prevent +% the LaTeX parser from getting confused when it sees the complicated +% \includegraphics command within an optional argument. (You could create +% your own custom macro containing the \includegraphics command to make things +% simpler here.) +%\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{mshell}}]{Michael Shell} +% or if you just want to reserve a space for a photo: + +\begin{IEEEbiography}{Michael Shell} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiography} + +% if you will not have a photo at all: +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{John Doe} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} + +% insert where needed to balance the two columns on the last page with +% biographies +%\newpage + +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{Jane Doe} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} + +% You can push biographies down or up by placing +% a \vfill before or after them. The appropriate +% use of \vfill depends on what kind of text is +% on the last page and whether or not the columns +% are being equalized. + +%\vfill + +% Can be used to pull up biographies so that the bottom of the last one +% is flush with the other column. +%\enlargethispage{-5in} + + + +% that's all folks +\end{document} + + diff --git a/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex b/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c98517 --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/bare_jrnl_transmag.tex @@ -0,0 +1,714 @@ + +%% bare_jrnl_transmag.tex +%% V1.4b +%% 2015/08/26 +%% by Michael Shell +%% see http://www.michaelshell.org/ +%% for current contact information. +%% +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE +%% Transactions on Magnetics journal paper. +%% +%% Support sites: +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran +%% and +%% http://www.ieee.org/ + +%%************************************************************************* +%% Legal Notice: +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! +%% User assumes all risk. +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse +%% of any information contained here. +%% +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. +%% +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released +%% 2003/12/01 or later. +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits. +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** +%%************************************************************************* + + +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system *** +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform *** +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can *** +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** *** +% The testflow support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/ + + + +\documentclass[journal,transmag]{IEEEtran} +% +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files, +% manually specify the path to it like: +% \documentclass[journal]{../sty/IEEEtran} + + + + + +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include: +% (uncomment the ones you want to load) + + +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{ifpdf} +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi. +% usage: +% \ifpdf +% % pdf code +% \else +% % dvi code +% \fi +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way. +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages. + + + + + + +% *** CITATION PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{cite} +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis. +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty. +% The latest version can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself. + + + + + + +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES *** +% +\ifCLASSINFOpdf + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png} +\else + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no + % driver is specified. + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx} + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}} + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with + % every instance of \includegraphics + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps} +\fi +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation +% can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex +% +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as +% well as large increases in file sizes. +% +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at: +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex + + + + +% *** MATH PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{amsmath} +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics. +% +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use: +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath + + + + + +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{algorithmic} +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito. +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms. +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable) +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx + + + + +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{array} +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty) +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array + + +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high +% quality. + + + + +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES *** +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=normalsize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig} +%\else +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig} +%\fi +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However, +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls +% handling of captions. +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a larger sans serif font +% than the serif footnote size font used in traditional IEEE formatting +% and thus the need to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending +% on whether compsoc mode has been enabled. +% +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig + + + +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{fixltx2e} +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column +% figure. +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer +% needed. +% The latest version and documentation can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e + + +%\usepackage{stfloats} +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command: +%\fnbelowfloat +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest +% version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in +% such ways. +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible. +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats: +% +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix} +% The latest version can be found at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix + + + + +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff +% \usepackage[nomarkers]{endfloat} +% \let\MYoriglatexcaption\caption +% \renewcommand{\caption}[2][\relax]{\MYoriglatexcaption[#2]{#2}} +%\fi +% endfloat.sty was written by James Darrell McCauley, Jeff Goldberg and +% Axel Sommerfeldt. This package may be useful when used in conjunction with +% IEEEtran.cls' captionsoff option. Some IEEE journals/societies require that +% submissions have lists of figures/tables at the end of the paper and that +% figures/tables without any captions are placed on a page by themselves at +% the end of the document. If needed, the draftcls IEEEtran class option or +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch interface can be used to increase the line +% spacing as well. Be sure and use the nomarkers option of endfloat to +% prevent endfloat from "marking" where the figures would have been placed +% in the text. The two hack lines of code above are a slight modification of +% that suggested by in the endfloat docs (section 8.4.1) to ensure that +% the full captions always appear in the list of figures/tables - even if +% the user used the short optional argument of \caption[]{}. +% IEEE papers do not typically make use of \caption[]'s optional argument, +% so this should not be an issue. A similar trick can be used to disable +% captions of packages such as subfig.sty that lack options to turn off +% the subcaptions: +% For subfig.sty: +% \let\MYorigsubfloat\subfloat +% \renewcommand{\subfloat}[2][\relax]{\MYorigsubfloat[]{#2}} +% However, the above trick will not work if both optional arguments of +% the \subfloat command are used. Furthermore, there needs to be a +% description of each subfigure *somewhere* and endfloat does not add +% subfigure captions to its list of figures. Thus, the best approach is to +% avoid the use of subfigure captions (many IEEE journals avoid them anyway) +% and instead reference/explain all the subfigures within the main caption. +% The latest version of endfloat.sty and its documentation can obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/endfloat +% +% The IEEEtran \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff conditional can also be used +% later in the document, say, to conditionally put the References on a +% page by themselves. + + + + +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES *** +% +%\usepackage{url} +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at: +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}. + + + + +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. *** +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). *** +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later. +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan +% to submit to, of course. ) + + +% correct bad hyphenation here +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor} + + +\begin{document} +% +% paper title +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as, +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title. +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired. +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title. +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE \textsc{Transactions on Magnetics}} + + + +% author names and affiliations +% transmag papers use the long conference author name format. + +\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}, +Homer Simpson\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}, +James Kirk\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}, +Montgomery Scott\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}, and +Eldon Tyrell\IEEEauthorrefmark{4},~\IEEEmembership{Fellow,~IEEE}} +\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}School of Electrical and Computer Engineering, +Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA 30332 USA} +\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}Twentieth Century Fox, Springfield, USA} +\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}Starfleet Academy, San Francisco, CA 96678 USA} +\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}Tyrell Inc., 123 Replicant Street, Los Angeles, CA 90210 USA}% <-this % stops an unwanted space +\thanks{Manuscript received December 1, 2012; revised August 26, 2015. +Corresponding author: M. Shell (email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html).}} + + + +% The paper headers +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~14, No.~8, August~2015}% +{Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for IEEE Transactions on Magnetics Journals} +% The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages +% after the title page when using the twoside option. +% +% *** Note that you probably will NOT want to include the author's *** +% *** name in the headers of peer review papers. *** +% You can use \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview for conditional compilation here if +% you desire. + + + + +% If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like +% this: +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE} +% Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second +% column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark. + + + +% use for special paper notices +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} + + +% for Transactions on Magnetics papers, we must declare the abstract and +% index terms PRIOR to the title within the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext +% IEEEtran command as these need to go into the title area created by +% \maketitle. +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations +% in the abstract or keywords. +\IEEEtitleabstractindextext{% +\begin{abstract} +The abstract goes here. +\end{abstract} + +% Note that keywords are not normally used for peerreview papers. +\begin{IEEEkeywords} +IEEE, IEEEtran, IEEE Transactions on Magnetics, journal, \LaTeX, magnetics, paper, template. +\end{IEEEkeywords}} + + + +% make the title area +\maketitle + + +% To allow for easy dual compilation without having to reenter the +% abstract/keywords data, the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext text will +% not be used in maketitle, but will appear (i.e., to be "transported") +% here as \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext when the compsoc +% or transmag modes are not selected if conference mode is selected +% - because all conference papers position the abstract like regular +% papers do. +\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext +% \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext has no effect when using +% compsoc or transmag under a non-conference mode. + + + + + + + +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover +% page as needed: +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center} +% \fi +% +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes. +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle + + + +\section{Introduction} +% The very first letter is a 2 line initial drop letter followed +% by the rest of the first word in caps. +% +% form to use if the first word consists of a single letter: +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{demo} file is .... +% +% form to use if you need the single drop letter followed by +% normal text (unknown if ever used by the IEEE): +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{}demo file is .... +% +% Some journals put the first two words in caps: +% \IEEEPARstart{T}{his demo} file is .... +% +% Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter +% and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word. +\IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file'' +for IEEE \textsc{Transactions on Magnetics} journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later. +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter +% (should never be an issue) +I wish you the best of success. + +\hfill mds + +\hfill August 26, 2015 + +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here} +Subsection text here. + +% needed in second column of first page if using \IEEEpubid +%\IEEEpubidadjcol + +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here} +Subsubsection text here. + + +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package. +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption. +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics. +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}. +% +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be +% displayed while in draft mode. +% +%\begin{figure}[!t] +%\centering +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure} +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex, +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions. +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure} + +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats. + + +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures. +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.) +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command, +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption. +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing. +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur. +% +%\begin{figure*}[!t] +%\centering +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_first_case}} +%\hfil +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}% +%\label{fig_second_case}} +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.} +%\label{fig_sim} +%\end{figure*} +% +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption. +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank, +% e.g., \subfloat[]. + + +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables. +% The \label must come after \caption as always. +% +%\begin{table}[!t] +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3} +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells +%\caption{An Example of a Table} +%\label{table_example} +%\centering +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here. +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|} +%\hline +%One & Two\\ +%\hline +%Three & Four\\ +%\hline +%\end{tabular} +%\end{table} + + +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also, +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use +% top floats exclusively. +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package. + + + + +\section{Conclusion} +The conclusion goes here. + + + + + +% if have a single appendix: +%\appendix[Proof of the Zonklar Equations] +% or +%\appendix % for no appendix heading +% do not use \section anymore after \appendix, only \section* +% is possibly needed + +% use appendices with more than one appendix +% then use \section to start each appendix +% you must declare a \section before using any +% \subsection or using \label (\appendices by itself +% starts a section numbered zero.) +% + + +\appendices +\section{Proof of the First Zonklar Equation} +Appendix one text goes here. + +% you can choose not to have a title for an appendix +% if you want by leaving the argument blank +\section{} +Appendix two text goes here. + + +% use section* for acknowledgment +\section*{Acknowledgment} + + +The authors would like to thank... + + +% Can use something like this to put references on a page +% by themselves when using endfloat and the captionsoff option. +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff + \newpage +\fi + + + +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if +% the document is modified later +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8} +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired: +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}} + +% references section + +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at: +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/ +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at: +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/ +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran} +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s) +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper} +% +% manually copy in the resultant .bbl file +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box) +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka} +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999. + +\end{thebibliography} + +% biography section +% +% If you have an EPS/PDF photo (graphicx package needed) extra braces are +% needed around the contents of the optional argument to biography to prevent +% the LaTeX parser from getting confused when it sees the complicated +% \includegraphics command within an optional argument. (You could create +% your own custom macro containing the \includegraphics command to make things +% simpler here.) +%\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{mshell}}]{Michael Shell} +% or if you just want to reserve a space for a photo: + +\begin{IEEEbiography}{Michael Shell} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiography} + +% if you will not have a photo at all: +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{John Doe} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} + +% insert where needed to balance the two columns on the last page with +% biographies +%\newpage + +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{Jane Doe} +Biography text here. +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto} + +% You can push biographies down or up by placing +% a \vfill before or after them. The appropriate +% use of \vfill depends on what kind of text is +% on the last page and whether or not the columns +% are being equalized. + +%\vfill + +% Can be used to pull up biographies so that the bottom of the last one +% is flush with the other column. +%\enlargethispage{-5in} + + + +% that's all folks +\end{document} + + diff --git a/IEEEtran/changelog.txt b/IEEEtran/changelog.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b9f6eb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/changelog.txt @@ -0,0 +1,783 @@ + + + Changelog history of the IEEEtran LaTeX class. + 2015/08/26 + by Michael Shell (MDS) + http://www.michaelshell.org/ + + + 2015/08/26 V1.8b (MDS) changes: + + 1) Added new comsoc mode for the IEEE Communications Society. + This mode (at present) only invokes the use of the newtxmath math fonts. + + 2) Revised IEEEeqnarray column specifications to work with active " + (or other punctuation catcode changes) as with babel under the + german or ngerman language modes. + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem. + + 3) Added \indexspace and other index related macros as newer versions of + article.cls now do. These macros are needed to avoid an error when + using the glossaries package. + Thanks to Sebastian Nyberg for suggesting this change. + + 4) Fixed odd/even page header font bug under compsoc mode and + other page style code improvements. + Thanks to Marco Paolieri for reporting this problem. + + 5) Added hooks to allow for easy control of spacing above title. + + 6) Added the \IEEEnoauxwrite command. + Thanks to Sudarshan Mukherjee for suggesting this feature. + + + 2014/09/17 V1.8a (MDS) changes: + + 1) Extensive rework of the compsoc mode to comply with the latest standards + of the IEEE Computer Society. + + 2) Internal code improvements for page setup and command argument + processing. + + 3) Fixed abstract, index terms and diamond line for compsoc technotes. + Thanks to Dimitris Schinianakis for reporting this problem. + + 4) New cspaper option to support the special trim paper size + (7.875in x 10.75in) used in actual Computer Society journals. For + compsoc journal mode, typesetting will not be altered by the use of this + option. + + 5) New \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command to provide for the special raised + first section heading of Computer Society journal papers. + + 6) Increased \clubpenalty, \widowpenalty, \displaywidowpenalty to + discourage paragraph breaks at the first and last lines. + Thanks to Dirk Beyer for suggesting this change. + + 7) Added lines per column console message. + + +******* + 2012/12/27 V1.8 (MDS) changes:: + + 1) New transmag class option to support the IEEE Transactions on Magnetics + format. Thanks to Wei Yingkang, Sangmin Suh and Benjamin Gaussens + for suggestions and beta testing. + + 2) The \IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext and + \IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext + commands have been deprecated in favor of their + \IEEEtitleabstractindextext and \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext + (observe that the "not" has changed to "non") equivalents. This change + generalizes and decouples them from compsoc mode because the new + transmag mode also uses them now. + + 3) Added new *-forms of \IEEEyesnumber*, \IEEEnonumber*, \IEEEyessubnumber*, + and \IEEEnosubnumber* (the non-star form of the latter is also new) which + persist across IEEEeqnarray lines until countermanded. To provide for + continued subequations across instances of IEEEeqnarrays as well as for + subequations that follow a main equation (e.g., 14, 14a, 14b ...) + \IEEEyessubnumber no longer automatically increments the equation number + on it's first invocation of a subequation group. Invoke both + \IEEEyesnumber\IEEEyessubnumber together to start a new + equation/subequation group. + + 4) Hyperref links now work with IEEEeqnarray equations. + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem. + + 5) Fixed \markboth so that it does not cause an error with babel.sty. + Thanks to Frank Meier for suggesting this change. + + 6) Change all instances of ~ to \nobreakspace to avoid + + ! Argument of \language@active@arg~ has an extra } + + figure caption error with bable.sty under spanish. Thanks to + Manuel Olivares and Javier Bezos for suggesting this change. + + 7) Allow line breaks within long theorem names. + Thanks to Miquel Payaro for suggesting this change. + + 8) Revised \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{} to allow inner alignments without + requiring extra containing braces to prevent an incomplete \ifx error. + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser and Auke van der Valk for reporting this + problem. + + 9) Revised spacing at top of top figures and tables to better + align with the top main text lines as IEEE does in its journals. + Thanks to Dirk Beyer for reporting this issue and beta testing. + +10) Removed support for legacy IED list commands, legacy QED and proof + commands and the legacy biography and biographynophoto environments. + IEEEtran no longer defines or references \labelindent so as to + avoid namespace problems with list packages that define it. + Thanks to Sven Köhler for reporting the problem with enumitem.sty. + + +******* + 2007/03/05 V1.7a (MDS) changes: + + 1) Corrected problem of unwanted two column peer review title page format. + Thanks to Virgilio Rodriguez for reporting this bug. + + 2) "depreciated" -> "deprecated". Thanks to Virgilio Rodriguez for + suggesting this change. + + + +******* + 2007/01/11 V1.7 (MDS) changes: + + 1) New class option compsoc to support the IEEE Computer Society format. + + 2) New class option captionsoff disables the display of figure/table + captions. endfloat.sty is now mentioned in the docs. Thanks to Geoff + Walker for suggesting these changes. + + 3) Fixed compatibility issues with subfig.sty and caption.sty. Thanks to + Steven Douglas Cochran and Axel Sommerfeldt for suggesting this change. + + 4) New \CLASSINPUT, \CLASSOPTION and \CLASSINFO interface allows for more + user control and conditional compilation. + + 5) \ifcenterfigcaptions (\centerfigcaptionstrue, \centerfigcaptionsfalse), + \CMPARstart and \overrideIEEEmargins have been removed and no are + longer supported. The effect of \overrideIEEEmargins can be mimicked + via the more general \CLASSINPUT interface: + % US letter paper: + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{0.775in} + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}{0.585in} + % A4 paper: + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{17mm} + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}{11.647mm} + + 6) Several commands and environments have been deprecated in favor of + replacements with IEEE prefixes to better avoid potential future name + clashes with other packages. Legacy code retained to allow the use of + the obsolete forms (for now), but with a warning message to the console + during compilation: + \IEEEauthorblockA, \IEEEauthorblockN, \IEEEauthorrefmark, + \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEkeywords, \IEEEPARstart, + \IEEEproof, \IEEEpubid, \IEEEpubidadjcol, \IEEEQED, \IEEEQEDclosed, + \IEEEQEDopen, \IEEEspecialpapernotice. IEEEtran.cls now redefines + \proof in way to avoid problems with the amsthm.sty package. + For IED lists: + \IEEEiedlabeljustifyc, \IEEEiedlabeljustifyl, \IEEEiedlabeljustifyr, + \IEEEnocalcleftmargin, \IEEElabelindent, \IEEEsetlabelwidth, + \IEEEusemathlabelsep + + 7) These commands/lengths now require the IEEE prefix and do not have + legacy support: \IEEEnormaljot. + For IED lists: \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin, \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor, + \IEEEiedlistdecl, \IEEElabelindentfactor + + 8) \normalsizebaselineskip skip replaced by + \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (nonrubber dimen) length. + Also, new \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (nonrubber dimen) + provided. + + 9) Now defaults to using Alpha numbering rather than Roman for appendices + numbering. This is because Alpha numbering is more common and avoids + problems with theorem numbering. \ifuseRomanappendices + (\useRomanappendicestrue, \useRomanappendicesfalse) is no longer + supported. Instead, use the new class option romanappendices if Roman + appendices numbering is desired. Thanks to Leonid Mirkin for reporting + the problem with theorems in appendices and suggesting changes. + +10) Improved paper size setting code for pdflatex. + +11) Better handling of theorem numbering when using the section counter + within the appendix(cies). Thanks to Leonid Mirkin for suggesting + this change. + +12) Fixed bug that caused equations at the end of theorems to be too + close to the line below them. + +13) Provided hook to conference mode console notice and changed notice to + better support conferences that use A4 paper. Thanks to Volker Kuhlmann + for suggesting this change. + +14) \IEEEauthorrefmark made robust to allow it to be used in \thanks + without a leading \protect + +15) Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with + OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use + available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. + +16) Revised internal \@sect command to be more robust for users who employ + modified section heading formats. Thanks to Zarko F. Cucej for + suggesting this change. + +17) Improved \thesubsubsection definition to prevent breaks at the hyphen. + Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change. Thanks to + Dan Luecking and Heiko Oberdiek for explaining some of the various + alternatives and techniques to fix it. + +18) No longer provide \NAT@parse hack to get cite.sty to play (somewhat) + with hyperref.sty as this is already included in cite.sty version + 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later. + +19) At the beginning of document, set the default style of url.sty to be + the same as the current text font - as is done in IEEE journals. + +20) Corrected excessive line spacing in journal table captions. Thanks to + Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change. + +21) Corrected \thesubsubsection to use the "I-A1" format IEEE uses rather + than "I-A.1" as was done before. Ditto for \theparagraph. Thanks to + Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change. + +22) Enclose papersize specials within \AtBeginDvi in case someone wants + to make a format with IEEEtran. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for + suggesting this change. + +23) Eliminated the small space after abstract and keywords dash as IEEE + now does. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change. + +24) IEEEkeywords is no longer locked out in conference mode + +25) Increase defaults of \binoppenalty and \relpenalty to discourage + breaks within equations. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for suggesting + this change. + +26) Support optional argument for IEEEproof. Thanks to Ingo Steinwart for + suggesting this change. Also, start a new \par with \IEEEproof. + +27) Add support for an optional argument to \bstctlcite. + +28) Changed \topfraction and \dbltopfraction from 1.0 to 0.9. Thanks to + Donald Arseneau for suggesting this change. + + +******* + 2005/09/13 V1.6c (MDS) changes: + + 1) Changed endfigure/endfloat definitions so as not to cause problems with + preview-LaTeX and other packages. Thanks to Stephan Heuel and David + Kastrup for reporting this problem. + + + +******* + 2002/11/18 V1.6b (MDS) changes: + + 1) Fixed problem with figure captions when using hyperref. Thanks to + Leandro Barajas and Michael Bassetti for reporting this bug. + + 2) Provide a fake nabib command \NAT@parse so that hyperref will not + interfere with the operation of cite.sty. However, as a result citation + numbers will not be hyperlinked. Also, natbib will not be able to work + with IEEEtran. However, this is perhaps the best solution until + cite.sty and hyperref.sty are able to co-exist with each other. + It easy enough to override the fake command via: + \makeatletter + \let\NAT@parse\undefined + \makeatother + + 3) Revised font selection method so as not to have problems when used + with setspace.sty. Thanks to Zhang Yan for reporting this bug. + + 4) Added \special to feed papersize to dvips. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann + for suggesting this feature. + + 5) In addition to the IEEE IED lists, the original IED style list + environments (as is done in article.cls) are now provided as + LaTeXitemize, LaTeXenumerate, and LaTeXdescription. Also, users can + now redefine \makelabel within IEEE IED list controls. There may be + some use for this in specialized applications. Thanks to Eli Barzilay + for suggesting this feature. + + 6) \table* now defaults to \footnotesize text like \table. + + 7) The draft modes now no longer force a pagebreak after the title. + Thanks to Christian Peel for suggesting this change. + + 8) New draftclsnofoot mode is like draftcls, but does not display the + date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot of the page. Thanks to + Christian Peel for suggesting this feature. + + 9) New peerreview and peerreviewca modes with \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle + command allows for a "cover" titlepage for anonymous peer review. + Except for the cover titlepage, peerreview is much like journal mode. + peerreviewca is like peerreview, but allows the author names to be + entered and formatted as under conference mode so that author + affiliations and contact information can be easily seen on the cover + page. Thanks to Eric Benedict for suggesting this feature. + + + +******* + 2002/08/13 V1.6 (MDS) changes: + + 1) Added conference mode via conference option. Defaults to the + traditional journal mode. e.g., \documentclass[conference]{IEEEtran} + + 2) Added support for A4 paper via new a4paper option. Pdflatex's paper + size lengths are now automatically set to the proper paper size being + used. + + 3) Revised margins again. Page text is now horizontally centered. + Conference mode increases the top and bottom margins with the bottom + margin being slightly larger. For A4 paper, the top margin and text + typesetting will not change from those of US letter paper, but the side + margins will be smaller and the bottom margin will be larger than that + of US letter. All per IEEE specs. + + 4) Fixed footnote line spacing anomaly in draft mode. + Thanks to Alberto Rodriguez for reporting this bug. + + Also, slightly revised footnote and \thanks note spacing. + Set \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 to prevent LaTeX + from breaking footnotes across multiple pages or columns. + + 5) Fixed bug that caused overwritten photo areas and sometimes anomalous + spacing when a new paragraph was started within a biography. Also, + the presence of \par's, new lines or spaces at the beginning of + abstract, keywords, biography, or biographynophoto will no longer + affect the first word spacing. + Thanks to Eric Durant for reporting this bug. + + The biography environment now does a better job in preventing + a biography photo area from being broken across pages or columns. + + 6) Fixed whitespace between \cite entries bug. i.e., + both \cite{einstein24, knuth84} and \cite{einstein24,knuth84} + are now valid. \cite is now a robust command as it should be. + IEEEtran now no longer defines the old non-standard \shortcite or + \citename. + + The base IEEEtran.cls does not sort citation numbers or produce ranges + for three or more consecutive numbers. However, V1.6 of IEEEtran.cls + now pre-defines the following format control macros to facilitate easy + use with Donald Arseneau's cite.sty package (tested with cite.sty V3.9): + + \def\citepunct{], [} + \def\citedash{]--[} + + cite.sty is standard on most LaTeX sytems and can be obtained from + www.ctan.org. Thanks to Donald Arseneau for creating cite.sty, + providing the required format arguments to produce the IEEE style + and designing a cite interface capable of handling the IEEE citation + style. + + Note: Historically, IEEE has wanted authors to "hardcode" symbolics. + (i.e., replace all \cite{} with fixed [x]). However, it now seems that + most electronic manuscript submissions to IEEE are in .pdf format, and + as such, do not require the LaTeX document reference numbers to be hard + coded. If an author is required to submit actual LaTeX files, I do + recommend that the bibliography file (.bbl) be copied into the .tex + document and the \bibliographystyle{} and \bibliography{} commands be + commented out so that the .tex file does not depend on (potentially + lengthy and/or confidential) external bibliography database files + + 7) Adjusted some spacing parameters. The spacing above and below equations + has been revised (to a typical IEEE value). \jot now has a decent value. + The title text is now exactly 24pt. (On a related note, \fontsubfuzz has + been increased to 0.9pt to prevent annoying font substitution warnings + when using the Computer Modern fonts that use the 24.88pt size.) + In V1.6, \small is now 8.5pt in 9pt docs because \footnotesize is 8pt. + For 9pt docs, you should probably go ahead and use \footnotesize when + you need text a little smaller than \normalsize. + The interword spacing has been adjusted to be extremely close to that + which IEEE uses. You can use a new class option, nofonttune, if you need + to disable the adjusting of the interword spacing. This adjustment and + an increase to \hyphenpenalty have greatly reduced the amount of + hyphenation in a typical paper. + The baselineskip for the normalsize fonts has been tweaked to reduce + underfull vboxes on journal paper columns with only paragraphs. + Conference mode does the same thing but by also tweaking the \textheight + slightly off 9.25in (IEEE spec) to ensure an integer number of lines per + page. Draft (also draftcls) mode has also been revised to reduce + underfull vbox warnings. However, draft mode can still produce underfull + vboxes (a direct result of the increase in line spacing and margins) if: + A non-normalsize font occupies an entire column (abstract and index + terms take up a whole column by themselves); or the beginning of a + section occurs near the end of a column and cannot be squeezed into the + bottom, etc. This is normal as draft mode's liberal spacings cannot + guarantee perfect formatting. + + 8) New biographynophoto environment for biographies without photos. + Usage: + + \begin{biographynophoto}{author name} + biography text here + \end{biographynophoto} + + 9) Fixed bug that produced multiple table of contents entries for papers + with more than one biography. Also, biography now works better with + hyperref. + +10) New \sublargesize font size command provides for 11pt text in a 10pt + document. (Needed for things like author names.) For documents not + using 10pt normal size text, \sublargesize is currently identical + to \large. + +11) New \IEEEmembership command to provide correct font to indicate IEEE + membership for journal papers. + +12) Fixed author name line overflow problem when in journal mode. This + problem had been introduced in V1.5 in my rush to get \and to work for + conferences. \and is unneeded (and invalid) in journal mode. For + conference mode, \and will work as expected and features an optional + spacing argument. i.e., \and[\hspace{5ex}] + \and will default (recommended) to using \hfill which will result in + equal spacing between author blocks. + +13) New \authorblockN, \authorblockA and \authorrefmark commands to + facilitate easy formatting of author names, affiliations and cross + reference symbols, respectively, when in conference mode. These + three commands are to be used only for conference papers. + In conference mode, \author text is placed within a modified tabular + environment (somewhat like article.cls). So, within \author in + conference mode, you should not try to enclose multiple \\ within an + environment or command (other than the argument braces of + \authorblockX{}). For example: + + \author{\authorblockN{{John Doe \\ Jane Doe}}} % WRONG! + + will generate an error. + + Note that font size/attribute changes will now persists across \\ + within \author. (But, not across author blocks nor across \and.) + However, with the new commands, there should be no need to alter any + font attributes within \author. All text sizing and spacing within + \author{} and the author block commands is per IEEE specs for both + conference and journal modes. (In conference mode, the author names + are only very slightly larger than the affiliations which are in normal + size.) For specialized applications you can alter the justification of + author lines by placing \hfill at the beginning or at the end of a line. + The interline spacing within \author is determined by the font + attributes that are in effect at the end of each line within author. + +14) Because the titles and author name blocks use different font + sizes/styles from the main text, it was possible that two column papers + with titles that span both columns (standard journal and conference + papers, but not technotes) with certain numbers of lines for the title + and authors' name/affiliations can cause underfull vbox problems + (paragraphs with large spacings between them) in the second column of + the main text on the title page - if there were no new sections, + equations or figures in this column (they would provide some needed + rubber spacing). The use of things like special paper notices and + publisher ID marks also affected this issue. The problem could not + happen in the first column because the first column has a rubber length + around the heading of the first section. Furthermore, problems seldom + occurred on pages after the first as the margins had been chosen not to + cause it with the popular font sizes. Rubber lengths after the author + names would not fix this problem. + Auto-calculating a "good" spacing after the title is a tad difficult + to do in LaTeX. However, I am pleased to report that V1.6 has this new + capability - "dynamically determined title spacing". IEEEtran will now + measure the height of all the title and author text in \maketitle + and then calculate a rigid (non-rubber) spacer to follow that meets + IEEE specs and also produces a \textheight on the title page that + ensures an integer number of normalsized lines on the rest of the page. + Single column papers, and two column papers with the title entirely in + column one (technotes) do not need dynamic rigid spacing and therefore + use standard rubber spacers. + + Note: This problem can still crop up if you use floats that span both + columns (i.e., figure*). It has been a decade+ long limitation with + LaTeX that the stretchable portion of \dbltextfloatsep is ignored. + If you get a problem with underful vbox warnings and paragraphs that + "are pulled apart" on page with a float that spans both columns, tweak + the space between the figure and the main text a little: + + \vskip 5pt + \end{figure*} + + If you can't find a value that fixes both columns, you are going to + have to put a rubber spacer somewhere in one or both of the columns. +15) Because of change #14 above, those of you using \pubid will, as of V1.6, + have to place it *before* \maketitle in order for it have the intended + affect. The dynamic spacer algorithm must see if you are using \pubid + when \maketitle is called. \pubidadjcol works as before except that it + now has additional logic to prevent it from doing anything if \pubid + was never called. + +16) In some unusual, non-standard circumstances, an author may desire to + alter the spacing after the title area or put some unusual text above + the main text. For instance, to stop a bad break when a new section + occurs right at the start of the second page. This is difficult to do + when the title spans both columns of two column text since LaTeX treats + such title text as a type of float. A new command, + \IEEEaftertitletext{}, gives access to the end of that produced by + \maketitle. The types of things that can go into \IEEEaftertitletext + are the same as those into \twocolumn[] - no \par, but \\ are OK. There + is no restriction on the range of spacings that can be used. e.g., + \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{-100pt}} will push the main text well into + the title and \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{100pt}} will push it far down + the page. You will have complete control. If used, place + \IEEEaftertitletext{} before \maketitle like \title and \author. + IEEEtran's dynamic title spacing intentionally does not take into + consideration the contents of \IEEEaftertitletext{} when determining + the spacer after the title area (otherwise it would try to second + guess you), so the user will have manually adjust the height of the + contents in \IEEEaftertitletext{} if the problem discussed in #14 above + should develop. A safe bet is to keep the height of contents of + \IEEEaftertitletext{} to integer multiples of \baselineskip, e.g., + \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{-1\baselineskip}} + + Because it can result in an IEEE nonstandard format, the use of + \IEEEaftertitletext{} is discouraged. Possible uses include (1) the use + of IEEEtran for non-IEEE work with different title spacing requirements, + or (2) as an emergency manual override if a problem should develop in + IEEEtran's automatic spacing algorithm. + +17) completely rewritten \PARstart to: + a. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment + within the paragraph that uses \PARstart. + b. auto-detect and use the current font family + c. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that + interword glue will now work as normal. + d. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. + + Because the current font family is now auto-detected, there is no + longer any need for \CMPARstart - it is now the same as \PARstart. + +18) There is now a new "open box" Q.E.D. symbol (\QEDopen) as well as the + original default (\QED) closed one (\QEDclosed). Some journals use + the open form. To make \proof use the open form, just do: + \renewcommand{\QED}{\QEDopen} + +19) Additional \typeout{} notices added to warn the user when unusual + settings/commands are detected or as reminders to avoid common errors + when in conference mode. + +20) IEEEtran now provides \abovecaptionskip and \belowcaptionskip skip + registers because article class provides them and some packages + may error if they are missing. However, IEEEtran only uses + \abovecaptionskip for actual caption spacing. + +21) Fixed bug that prevented users from redefining the section headings + to use arabic digits. Thanks to Richardt H. Wilkinson for reporting + this bug. + +22) Code cleaned up to be more efficient with the use of TeX registers; + removed some old LaTeX 2.09 code; revised option processing to + LaTeX2e standard; eliminated unwanted "phantom" spaces in some + environments. + +23) Added new \IEEEeqnarray, \IEEEeqnarraybox, \IEEEeqnarrayboxm and + \IEEEeqnarrayboxt environments to provide superior alternatives to the + standard LaTeX \eqnarray, \array and \tabular. Additional new support + commands include \IEEEeqnarraydecl, \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl, + \IEEEeqnarraymathstyle, \IEEEeqnarraytextstyle, \yesnumber. + \IEEEnonumber, \IEEEyesnumber, \IEEEyessubnumber, \IEEEeqnarraynumspace, + \IEEEeqnarraymulticol, \IEEEeqnarrayomit, \IEEEeqnarraydefcol, + \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep, \IEEEeqnarrayseprow, \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut, + \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow, \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut, + \IEEEeqnarraystrutmode, \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize, + \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd, \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse and \IEEEstrut. + These are documented in the user's guide. + +24) V1.6 changed back to using () around theorem names (which are also now + in italics) as this is what IEEE is using now. Thanks to Christian Peel + for reporting this. Also, when section numbers are used as the first + part of theorem numbers, display them in arabic, not Roman. + +25) New \IEEEtriggeratref{X} command allows a page break to be triggered + just before the given reference number "X". This is most useful when + balancing the columns on the last page and a \newpage between references + is desired. \IEEEtriggercmd{X} allows a different command to be executed + at trigger. + + + +******* + 2001/07/26 V1.5 (MDS) changes: + + + 1) Fixed \and within \author bug: (! Misplaced \crcr. \endtabular ->\crcr) + Thanks to Rainer Dorsch for discovering and reporting that \and + did not work. + + 2) Fixed the biography environment so that if a biography's text is shorter + than the area allocated for the photo, a collision with the next + biography does not occur. You can now put real graphics (using the + graphicx package) into the biography photo box with a new optional + argument of the biography command! For example: + + \begin{biography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip, + keepaspectratio]{./tux.eps}}]{Linux Penguin} + + will use the specified graphic as the author's photo. The photo area is + exactly 1in wide by 1.25in high - as is done in IEEE Transactions. Try + to keep the same 4:5 aspect ratio if scanning/cropping your photos. + Note the need for the extra set of enclosing braces around the + \includegraphics. Without it, The LaTeX parser may get confused when it + sees the \includegraphics's brackets within the biography's optional + argument. Due to the length of the \includegraphics command, you may + wish to define your own shorthand form of it. I have not done so with + IEEEtran to prevent dependence on the graphicx package. If you do not + use the optional argument, or leave it empty, a standard frame box + with the words "Place Photo Here" will be used. If you want the space + to remain completely empty, you can do: + + \begin{biography}[\mbox{}]{The Invisible Man} + + The interface to biography's optional argument is into a + 1in X 1.25in minipage in which the argument text is centered both + horizontally and vertically: + + \begin{minipage}[b][1.25in][c]{1in}% + \centering + #1% + \end{minipage} + + Within the biography environment, \unitlength is set to 1in. + With this in mind, you can even design your own custom frameboxes. + For instance: + + \begin{biography}[\framebox(1,1.25){\parbox[][\height + ][c]{0.9in}{\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ + HERE}}]{Author Name} + + will yield the same type of result as the default photo box. + + Thanks to Herbert Voss for discovering the collision bug, suggesting + the ability to handle graphics and providing some prototype code. + + + +******* + 2001/03/15 V1.4 (MDS) changes: + + + 1) New "draftcls" and "final" options have been added. + Thanks to Dragan Cvetkovic for suggesting an option like draftcls. + + 2) Documentation changes to reflect the fact that this IEEEtran.cls + is no longer beta test. + + 3) Slightly revised caption sizes. Figure and table captions are now + in \footnotesize, not \small as before. + + 4) Allow user to control figure caption justification. IEEEtran.cls + normally defaults to left justified as is done in Transactions. + However, for conferences, you may wish to issue the command: + \centerfigcaptionstrue + in the preamble. Short (less than one line long) figure captions + will then be centered. Multi-line figure captions will always be + properly left justified. V1.6: This is already done for you when + using the conference mode. + + + +******* + 2001/01/18 V1.3 + Michael Shell (MDS) made extensive changes and additions: + + + BUGS FIXED (and many others too numerous to mention!): + 1) Fixed improper alignment with itemized, enumerated and + description lists. Added new controls to these three + environments so that it is easy to get the alignment IEEE + uses. Furthermore, the itemize, enumerate and description lists + no longer force a new paragraph to begin at the end the list + (\par). (Sometimes lists are used within paragraphs.) + + 2) JVH's fixes now allow things like $\mathbf{N}(0,P(0))$ + to work properly without needing the extra braces: + ${\mathbf{N}}(0,P(0))$. There is no longer any dependence + on the "rawfonts" and "oldlfont" packages. Thanks Juergen! + + 3) Fixed underfull hbox errors and incorrect reference number + alignment when the number of references in the bibliography + exceeded 9 entries (which is almost every paper!). + + 4) Removed dependence on the LaTeX sizexx.clo files. + Now, 9pt documents should work correctly even on systems that + lack a size9.clo file. This is most often used in conjunction + with the option "technote" for "correspondence" papers like those + in IEEE Transactions on Information Theory. For virtually all + other papers, 10pt is used and so it is the default. + Some improper font sizes have been corrected. \footnotesize is + now 8pt in 9pt docs, so footnotes in technotes should be the + correct size now. + + 5) Added \interlinepenalty within the bibliography section to discourage + LaTeX from breaking within a reference. IEEE almost never breaks within + a reference and when they do it is usually in technotes + (correspondence papers). You may get an underfull vbox warning in the + bibliography indicating that the spacing just before the "REFERENCES" + section is larger than normal, but the final result will be more like + what IEEE will publish. See the comments in the BIBLIOGRAPHY section + around line 2034 below if you want to change this behavior. + + 6) No longer "blows up" when you use \paragraph and have a table + of contents. + + 7) Theorem environment changed, (but for V1.6, back to the old way, sigh). + + 8) Figure captions adjusted: IEEE left (not center) justifies + figure captions (for journals) and does not indent figure caption text. + + 9) Adjusted some spacings in the table of contents(TOC))/list-of-figures/ + list-of-tables so that section/table numbers will not so easily + collide with the titles. Section VIII was usually the worst offender. + Still doesn't right justify the section numbers, but neither does + article.cls (This must be why LaTeX likes the x.y.z section numbering + scheme unlike I, II, III, etc. of IEEE. ) + It may be "normal" as it is (left justified). sigh. + +10) Now uses "index terms" now as a heading instead of "keywords". + Furthermore, the "index terms" and "abstract" headings are in bold + italic. This is how IEEE does things. + +11) \thebibliography and \biography now put entries into + the table of contents for you. + + +******* + + + + + ******* + 2000/09/06 (JVH) changes: (now designated as V1.2) + + made some corrections to get closer to LaTeX2e + 20000906 Juergen v.Hagen + vonhagen@ihefiji.etec.uni-karlsruhe.de + + Permission to redistribute granted as of December 2000. + ******* + + + + + + ******* + + 1996 (JWD) LaTeX2e version: (now designated as V1.1) + + In the most recent TeXhax digest, there was a request for a copy of + IEEEtrans.sty modified to work with LaTeX2e. I have a version I + modified to make it IEEEtrans.cls, which I have sent to the person + making the request and am now sending to you to consider posting to + the archives. + -- + Jon Dixon + dixonj@colorado.edu + http://spot.colorado.edu/~dixonj/ + +******* + + + + + +******* + + 30-August-1993 original LaTeX 2.09 version (IEEEtran.sty), + (now designated as V1.0): + + by Gerry Murray and Silvano Balemi + Automatic Control Lab, ETH Zurich, Switzerland + balemi@aut.ee.ethz.ch + +******* + + + diff --git a/IEEEtran/conference_071817.pdf b/IEEEtran/conference_071817.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dcc771d Binary files /dev/null and b/IEEEtran/conference_071817.pdf differ diff --git a/IEEEtran/conference_071817.tex b/IEEEtran/conference_071817.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..34c5781 --- /dev/null +++ b/IEEEtran/conference_071817.tex @@ -0,0 +1,284 @@ +\documentclass[conference]{IEEEtran} +\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts +% The preceding line is only needed to identify funding in the first footnote. If that is unneeded, please comment it out. +\usepackage{cite} +\usepackage{amsmath,amssymb,amsfonts} +\usepackage{algorithmic} +\usepackage{graphicx} +\usepackage{textcomp} +\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em + T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}} +\begin{document} + +\title{Paper Title*\\ +{\footnotesize \textsuperscript{*}Note: Sub-titles are not captured in Xplore and +should not be used} +\thanks{Identify applicable funding agency here. If none, delete this.} +} + +\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{1\textsuperscript{st} Given Name Surname} +\IEEEauthorblockA{\textit{dept. name of organization (of Aff.)} \\ +\textit{name of organization (of Aff.)}\\ +City, Country \\ +email address} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{2\textsuperscript{nd} Given Name Surname} +\IEEEauthorblockA{\textit{dept. name of organization (of Aff.)} \\ +\textit{name of organization (of Aff.)}\\ +City, Country \\ +email address} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{3\textsuperscript{rd} Given Name Surname} +\IEEEauthorblockA{\textit{dept. name of organization (of Aff.)} \\ +\textit{name of organization (of Aff.)}\\ +City, Country \\ +email address} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{4\textsuperscript{th} Given Name Surname} +\IEEEauthorblockA{\textit{dept. name of organization (of Aff.)} \\ +\textit{name of organization (of Aff.)}\\ +City, Country \\ +email address} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{5\textsuperscript{th} Given Name Surname} +\IEEEauthorblockA{\textit{dept. name of organization (of Aff.)} \\ +\textit{name of organization (of Aff.)}\\ +City, Country \\ +email address} +\and +\IEEEauthorblockN{6\textsuperscript{th} Given Name Surname} +\IEEEauthorblockA{\textit{dept. name of organization (of Aff.)} \\ +\textit{name of organization (of Aff.)}\\ +City, Country \\ +email address} +} + +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} +This document is a model and instructions for \LaTeX. +This and the IEEEtran.cls file define the components of your paper [title, text, heads, etc.]. *CRITICAL: Do Not Use Symbols, Special Characters, Footnotes, +or Math in Paper Title or Abstract. +\end{abstract} + +\begin{IEEEkeywords} +component, formatting, style, styling, insert +\end{IEEEkeywords} + +\section{Introduction} +This document is a model and instructions for \LaTeX. +Please observe the conference page limits. + +\section{Ease of Use} + +\subsection{Maintaining the Integrity of the Specifications} + +The IEEEtran class file is used to format your paper and style the text. All margins, +column widths, line spaces, and text fonts are prescribed; please do not +alter them. You may note peculiarities. For example, the head margin +measures proportionately more than is customary. This measurement +and others are deliberate, using specifications that anticipate your paper +as one part of the entire proceedings, and not as an independent document. +Please do not revise any of the current designations. + +\section{Prepare Your Paper Before Styling} +Before you begin to format your paper, first write and save the content as a +separate text file. Complete all content and organizational editing before +formatting. Please note sections \ref{AA}--\ref{SCM} below for more information on +proofreading, spelling and grammar. + +Keep your text and graphic files separate until after the text has been +formatted and styled. Do not number text heads---{\LaTeX} will do that +for you. + +\subsection{Abbreviations and Acronyms}\label{AA} +Define abbreviations and acronyms the first time they are used in the text, +even after they have been defined in the abstract. Abbreviations such as +IEEE, SI, MKS, CGS, ac, dc, and rms do not have to be defined. Do not use +abbreviations in the title or heads unless they are unavoidable. + +\subsection{Units} +\begin{itemize} +\item Use either SI (MKS) or CGS as primary units. (SI units are encouraged.) English units may be used as secondary units (in parentheses). An exception would be the use of English units as identifiers in trade, such as ``3.5-inch disk drive''. +\item Avoid combining SI and CGS units, such as current in amperes and magnetic field in oersteds. This often leads to confusion because equations do not balance dimensionally. If you must use mixed units, clearly state the units for each quantity that you use in an equation. +\item Do not mix complete spellings and abbreviations of units: ``Wb/m\textsuperscript{2}'' or ``webers per square meter'', not ``webers/m\textsuperscript{2}''. Spell out units when they appear in text: ``. . . a few henries'', not ``. . . a few H''. +\item Use a zero before decimal points: ``0.25'', not ``.25''. Use ``cm\textsuperscript{3}'', not ``cc''.) +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Equations} +Number equations consecutively. To make your +equations more compact, you may use the solidus (~/~), the exp function, or +appropriate exponents. Italicize Roman symbols for quantities and variables, +but not Greek symbols. Use a long dash rather than a hyphen for a minus +sign. Punctuate equations with commas or periods when they are part of a +sentence, as in: +\begin{equation} +a+b=\gamma\label{eq} +\end{equation} + +Be sure that the +symbols in your equation have been defined before or immediately following +the equation. Use ``\eqref{eq}'', not ``Eq.~\eqref{eq}'' or ``equation \eqref{eq}'', except at +the beginning of a sentence: ``Equation \eqref{eq} is . . .'' + +\subsection{\LaTeX-Specific Advice} + +Please use ``soft'' (e.g., \verb|\eqref{Eq}|) cross references instead +of ``hard'' references (e.g., \verb|(1)|). That will make it possible +to combine sections, add equations, or change the order of figures or +citations without having to go through the file line by line. + +Please don't use the \verb|{eqnarray}| equation environment. Use +\verb|{align}| or \verb|{IEEEeqnarray}| instead. The \verb|{eqnarray}| +environment leaves unsightly spaces around relation symbols. + +Please note that the \verb|{subequations}| environment in {\LaTeX} +will increment the main equation counter even when there are no +equation numbers displayed. If you forget that, you might write an +article in which the equation numbers skip from (17) to (20), causing +the copy editors to wonder if you've discovered a new method of +counting. + +{\BibTeX} does not work by magic. It doesn't get the bibliographic +data from thin air but from .bib files. If you use {\BibTeX} to produce a +bibliography you must send the .bib files. + +{\LaTeX} can't read your mind. If you assign the same label to a +subsubsection and a table, you might find that Table I has been cross +referenced as Table IV-B3. + +{\LaTeX} does not have precognitive abilities. If you put a +\verb|\label| command before the command that updates the counter it's +supposed to be using, the label will pick up the last counter to be +cross referenced instead. In particular, a \verb|\label| command +should not go before the caption of a figure or a table. + +Do not use \verb|\nonumber| inside the \verb|{array}| environment. It +will not stop equation numbers inside \verb|{array}| (there won't be +any anyway) and it might stop a wanted equation number in the +surrounding equation. + +\subsection{Some Common Mistakes}\label{SCM} +\begin{itemize} +\item The word ``data'' is plural, not singular. +\item The subscript for the permeability of vacuum $\mu_{0}$, and other common scientific constants, is zero with subscript formatting, not a lowercase letter ``o''. +\item In American English, commas, semicolons, periods, question and exclamation marks are located within quotation marks only when a complete thought or name is cited, such as a title or full quotation. When quotation marks are used, instead of a bold or italic typeface, to highlight a word or phrase, punctuation should appear outside of the quotation marks. A parenthetical phrase or statement at the end of a sentence is punctuated outside of the closing parenthesis (like this). (A parenthetical sentence is punctuated within the parentheses.) +\item A graph within a graph is an ``inset'', not an ``insert''. The word alternatively is preferred to the word ``alternately'' (unless you really mean something that alternates). +\item Do not use the word ``essentially'' to mean ``approximately'' or ``effectively''. +\item In your paper title, if the words ``that uses'' can accurately replace the word ``using'', capitalize the ``u''; if not, keep using lower-cased. +\item Be aware of the different meanings of the homophones ``affect'' and ``effect'', ``complement'' and ``compliment'', ``discreet'' and ``discrete'', ``principal'' and ``principle''. +\item Do not confuse ``imply'' and ``infer''. +\item The prefix ``non'' is not a word; it should be joined to the word it modifies, usually without a hyphen. +\item There is no period after the ``et'' in the Latin abbreviation ``et al.''. +\item The abbreviation ``i.e.'' means ``that is'', and the abbreviation ``e.g.'' means ``for example''. +\end{itemize} +An excellent style manual for science writers is \cite{b7}. + +\subsection{Authors and Affiliations} +\textbf{The class file is designed for, but not limited to, six authors.} A +minimum of one author is required for all conference articles. Author names +should be listed starting from left to right and then moving down to the +next line. This is the author sequence that will be used in future citations +and by indexing services. Names should not be listed in columns nor group by +affiliation. Please keep your affiliations as succinct as possible (for +example, do not differentiate among departments of the same organization). + +\subsection{Identify the Headings} +Headings, or heads, are organizational devices that guide the reader through +your paper. There are two types: component heads and text heads. + +Component heads identify the different components of your paper and are not +topically subordinate to each other. Examples include Acknowledgments and +References and, for these, the correct style to use is ``Heading 5''. Use +``figure caption'' for your Figure captions, and ``table head'' for your +table title. Run-in heads, such as ``Abstract'', will require you to apply a +style (in this case, italic) in addition to the style provided by the drop +down menu to differentiate the head from the text. + +Text heads organize the topics on a relational, hierarchical basis. For +example, the paper title is the primary text head because all subsequent +material relates and elaborates on this one topic. If there are two or more +sub-topics, the next level head (uppercase Roman numerals) should be used +and, conversely, if there are not at least two sub-topics, then no subheads +should be introduced. + +\subsection{Figures and Tables} +\paragraph{Positioning Figures and Tables} Place figures and tables at the top and +bottom of columns. Avoid placing them in the middle of columns. Large +figures and tables may span across both columns. Figure captions should be +below the figures; table heads should appear above the tables. Insert +figures and tables after they are cited in the text. Use the abbreviation +``Fig.~\ref{fig}'', even at the beginning of a sentence. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\caption{Table Type Styles} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|} +\hline +\textbf{Table}&\multicolumn{3}{|c|}{\textbf{Table Column Head}} \\ +\cline{2-4} +\textbf{Head} & \textbf{\textit{Table column subhead}}& \textbf{\textit{Subhead}}& \textbf{\textit{Subhead}} \\ +\hline +copy& More table copy$^{\mathrm{a}}$& & \\ +\hline +\multicolumn{4}{l}{$^{\mathrm{a}}$Sample of a Table footnote.} +\end{tabular} +\label{tab1} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{figure}[htbp] +\centerline{\includegraphics{fig1.png}} +\caption{Example of a figure caption.} +\label{fig} +\end{figure} + +Figure Labels: Use 8 point Times New Roman for Figure labels. Use words +rather than symbols or abbreviations when writing Figure axis labels to +avoid confusing the reader. As an example, write the quantity +``Magnetization'', or ``Magnetization, M'', not just ``M''. If including +units in the label, present them within parentheses. Do not label axes only +with units. In the example, write ``Magnetization (A/m)'' or ``Magnetization +\{A[m(1)]\}'', not just ``A/m''. Do not label axes with a ratio of +quantities and units. For example, write ``Temperature (K)'', not +``Temperature/K''. + +\section*{Acknowledgment} + +The preferred spelling of the word ``acknowledgment'' in America is without +an ``e'' after the ``g''. Avoid the stilted expression ``one of us (R. B. +G.) thanks $\ldots$''. Instead, try ``R. B. G. thanks$\ldots$''. Put sponsor +acknowledgments in the unnumbered footnote on the first page. + +\section*{References} + +Please number citations consecutively within brackets \cite{b1}. The +sentence punctuation follows the bracket \cite{b2}. Refer simply to the reference +number, as in \cite{b3}---do not use ``Ref. \cite{b3}'' or ``reference \cite{b3}'' except at +the beginning of a sentence: ``Reference \cite{b3} was the first $\ldots$'' + +Number footnotes separately in superscripts. Place the actual footnote at +the bottom of the column in which it was cited. Do not put footnotes in the +abstract or reference list. Use letters for table footnotes. + +Unless there are six authors or more give all authors' names; do not use +``et al.''. Papers that have not been published, even if they have been +submitted for publication, should be cited as ``unpublished'' \cite{b4}. Papers +that have been accepted for publication should be cited as ``in press'' \cite{b5}. +Capitalize only the first word in a paper title, except for proper nouns and +element symbols. + +For papers published in translation journals, please give the English +citation first, followed by the original foreign-language citation \cite{b6}. + +\begin{thebibliography}{00} +\bibitem{b1} G. Eason, B. Noble, and I. N. Sneddon, ``On certain integrals of Lipschitz-Hankel type involving products of Bessel functions,'' Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, vol. A247, pp. 529--551, April 1955. +\bibitem{b2} J. Clerk Maxwell, A Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism, 3rd ed., vol. 2. Oxford: Clarendon, 1892, pp.68--73. +\bibitem{b3} I. S. Jacobs and C. P. Bean, ``Fine particles, thin films and exchange anisotropy,'' in Magnetism, vol. III, G. T. Rado and H. Suhl, Eds. New York: Academic, 1963, pp. 271--350. +\bibitem{b4} K. Elissa, ``Title of paper if known,'' unpublished. +\bibitem{b5} R. Nicole, ``Title of paper with only first word capitalized,'' J. Name Stand. Abbrev., in press. +\bibitem{b6} Y. Yorozu, M. Hirano, K. Oka, and Y. Tagawa, ``Electron spectroscopy studies on magneto-optical media and plastic substrate interface,'' IEEE Transl. J. Magn. Japan, vol. 2, pp. 740--741, August 1987 [Digests 9th Annual Conf. Magnetics Japan, p. 301, 1982]. +\bibitem{b7} M. Young, The Technical Writer's Handbook. Mill Valley, CA: University Science, 1989. +\end{thebibliography} + +\end{document}